14.12.2012 Views

Manual Field Bus Controller - New Lift

Manual Field Bus Controller - New Lift

Manual Field Bus Controller - New Lift

SHOW MORE
SHOW LESS

Create successful ePaper yourself

Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.

<strong>Field</strong> <strong>Bus</strong> <strong>Controller</strong><br />

X1<br />

. 2<br />

. 3<br />

. 4<br />

. 5<br />

. 6<br />

. 7<br />

. 8<br />

. 9<br />

. 10<br />

. 11<br />

. 12<br />

. 13<br />

. 14.<br />

15<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 149<br />

10<br />

. 16<br />

. 17<br />

. 18.<br />

19<br />

. 20.<br />

21<br />

. 22<br />

. 23.<br />

24<br />

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20<br />

X4<br />

. 2<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 X5 9 10<br />

Schach t BUS /<br />

X6 shaft bus<br />

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20<br />

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10<br />

T<br />

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20<br />

<strong>Manual</strong><br />

1<br />

3<br />

X1<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

8<br />

9<br />

10<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

15<br />

16<br />

17<br />

18<br />

19<br />

20<br />

21<br />

22<br />

23<br />

24<br />

X2<br />

X3<br />

X4<br />

Option<br />

BUS<br />

[ Umschalttaste /<br />

shift ]<br />

GESCHLOSSEN<br />

###@###-<br />

>A<<br />

14:03:02<br />

01<br />

SKZU<br />

SPB<br />

SPA<br />

TKA<br />

T<br />

X8 Speicherkart e / memory-card<br />

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19<br />

Antrieb /<br />

drive<br />

Außensteuerun g Aus /<br />

landing calls off<br />

[ Anzeige links /<br />

display left ]<br />

HHT<br />

BUS<br />

Schacht-BU S Einspeisun g /<br />

shaft or group-bus powe r input<br />

KB<br />

T<br />

D<br />

Sicherheitskrei s / safety circuit<br />

KC<br />

N<br />

H<br />

FKNH<br />

SKZU SPB SPA TKA TKB TKC NH LT FKNHLT<br />

Oberster Ruf / top call<br />

[ eins auf / one up ]<br />

Unterster Ruf / bottom call<br />

[einsab/ one down ]<br />

Rev. D2.2b<br />

X20.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 X21.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 X22.2 .3 .4 .5 .6<br />

A1<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C<br />

D<br />

Menü , Eingabe / menu, enter<br />

[ Infoanzeige / info screen ]<br />

FST<br />

STATUS<br />

ERROR<br />

0036<br />

AEB-004<br />

X9<br />

Service<br />

(RS-232)<br />

X10<br />

Modem<br />

(RS-232)<br />

X11<br />

Antrieb /<br />

drive<br />

Testmen ü / test menu<br />

[ Anzeige rechts / display right ]<br />

X12<br />

Drehgeber /<br />

encoder<br />

X6 2 . 3 . 4 . 5 6 . 7 8 . 9 X5 2 3 . 4 . 5 X4 2 3 . 4 X3 . 2 3 4 . 5 6 X2 . 2 . 3 4 . 5 . 6 X1<br />

. 2 . 3 . 4 . 5 . 6 7 8 9<br />

X7 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6<br />

X13.<br />

2<br />

. 3<br />

. 4<br />

. 5<br />

. 6<br />

. 7<br />

. 8<br />

. 9<br />

. 10<br />

. 11<br />

. 12<br />

X20.2 .3 .4 .<br />

T<br />

X8 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6<br />

X9 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6<br />

X19.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 X18.2 .3 .4 .<br />

X15. 2 . 3 . 4 X14. 2 . 3 4 . 5 . 6 X13<br />

2 3 . 4<br />

X11.<br />

2 . 3 4 . 5 X10.<br />

2 . 3 4 . 5 . 6 . 7 . 8 . 9<br />

X17 2 3 . 4 X16<br />

2 3 . 4


Publisher NEW LIFT Steuerungsbau GmbH<br />

Lochhamer Schlag 8<br />

D-82166 Gräfelfing<br />

Phone: +49 (0) 89 / 89 866 - 0<br />

Fax: +49 (0) 89 / 89 866 - 300<br />

Doc. No. FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

Date of issue 12/05<br />

Software version V1.100-0350<br />

Copyright © 2005, NEW LIFT Steuerungsbau GmbH<br />

All rights including those of copying and reproduction of parts of this<br />

description and of the translation are reserved by the publisher.<br />

No part of this description may be reproduced in any form or copied with an<br />

electronic replication system without the written permission of the<br />

publisher.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Table of contents<br />

1 About this manual .............................................................................................. 5<br />

1.1 General........................................................................................................................... 5<br />

1.2 Signs and Symbols used ....................................................................................... 5<br />

1.3 Further information................................................................................................... 6<br />

2 General Safety Regulations ......................................................................... 7<br />

2.1 Standards and regulations applied.................................................................... 7<br />

2.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)................................................................ 8<br />

2.3 Handling electronic components........................................................................ 8<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface ................................................................ 9<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages ................................................................................... 10<br />

Main screen..................................................................................................................... 10<br />

Line A .............................................................................................................................. 10<br />

Line B .............................................................................................................................. 11<br />

Line C .............................................................................................................................. 13<br />

Line D .............................................................................................................................. 27<br />

Information texts.............................................................................................................. 28<br />

Information page.............................................................................................................. 31<br />

3.2 Keypad functions ................................................................................................... 32<br />

Frequency converter with DCP interface......................................................................... 32<br />

When switching on .......................................................................................................... 32<br />

Main screen..................................................................................................................... 33<br />

Main menu and test menu............................................................................................... 33<br />

Error list ........................................................................................................................... 34<br />

Information page.............................................................................................................. 34<br />

3.3 LEDs.............................................................................................................................. 34<br />

4 Technical data ..................................................................................................... 35<br />

4.1 Component overview – bus plan ...................................................................... 36<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>....................................................................................................... 37<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 1


Table of contents<br />

Safety Monitoring Device................................................................................................. 44<br />

4.3 FSM car control module........................................................................................ 53<br />

4.4 FPM car panel module........................................................................................... 65<br />

4.5 FPE car panel extension module ..................................................................... 72<br />

4.6 FPA car control panel adapter ........................................................................... 77<br />

4.7 ADM landing call module ..................................................................................... 81<br />

4.8 RIO-ADM remote I/O module............................................................................... 84<br />

4.9 RIO-FPM remote I/O module ............................................................................... 87<br />

4.10 LON bus....................................................................................................................... 91<br />

4.11 Trailing ribbon cable .............................................................................................. 92<br />

5 Menu tree .................................................................................................................95<br />

5.1 General......................................................................................................................... 95<br />

5.2 MAIN MENU – Service.......................................................................................... 104<br />

5.3 MAIN MENU – Drive .............................................................................................. 106<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config ........................................................................................... 111<br />

5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning.................................................................................. 127<br />

5.6 MAIN MENUE – Calls............................................................................................ 134<br />

5.7 MAIN MENUE – System....................................................................................... 136<br />

5.8 MAIN MENUE – Doors.......................................................................................... 139<br />

5.9 MAIN MENU.............................................................................................................. 144<br />

5.10 TEST MENU.............................................................................................................. 145<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs .................................................... 147<br />

2 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Table of contents<br />

General.......................................................................................................................... 147<br />

Programming ................................................................................................................. 148<br />

Setting the RAW register............................................................................................... 148<br />

Function “landing call” ................................................................................................... 153<br />

Function “fire signal” ...................................................................................................... 154<br />

Function “priority landing” .............................................................................................. 155<br />

Function “position indicator” .......................................................................................... 156<br />

Function “flag”................................................................................................................ 157<br />

User error ...................................................................................................................... 161<br />

Function “signal”............................................................................................................ 162<br />

Function “evacuation”.................................................................................................... 164<br />

Function “special drive” ................................................................................................. 166<br />

Function “alarm misuse”................................................................................................ 167<br />

Function “speed threshold”............................................................................................ 168<br />

Function “ramp drive” .................................................................................................... 169<br />

Function “override floor blocking” .................................................................................. 170<br />

Function “block floors” ................................................................................................... 171<br />

7 Error List ................................................................................................................ 173<br />

7.1 LC-Display ................................................................................................................ 173<br />

7.2 Keypad functions .................................................................................................. 173<br />

7.3 Event messages..................................................................................................... 174<br />

7.4 Error messages...................................................................................................... 175<br />

8 Index ......................................................................................................................... 181<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 3


Table of contents<br />

4 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


1 About this manual<br />

1.1 General<br />

1 About this manual<br />

1.1 General<br />

The FST-2 manual is a comprehensive reference work for experienced lift<br />

service experts.<br />

Goals of this manual<br />

1.2 Signs and Symbols used<br />

- describe the characteristics of the LON bus technology<br />

- describe technical details and functions of the FST-2 and its<br />

components<br />

- describe the operation of the FST-2<br />

- describe the configuration of the FST-2<br />

- describe the FST-2 menu and its settings<br />

- describe the messages of the FST-2<br />

Below you can find a description of the signs and symbols used in this<br />

manual.<br />

Symbols + Key combination:<br />

Press the linked keys simultaneously.<br />

� Action:<br />

Actions are executed immediately and will not be saved as permanent<br />

settings.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 5


1 About this manual<br />

1.3 Further information<br />

LC-Display and keypad In the left column you will find the LC-Display of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> with<br />

a grey background. The displays and messages or possible keypad<br />

functions are explained in the table.<br />

LC-Display<br />

1.3 Further information<br />

Line or<br />

key<br />

The following documentation is available for the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> and its<br />

components:<br />

- Description of FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- FST-2 Installation & Commissioning<br />

- FST-2 Quick Guide<br />

- FST-2 <strong>Manual</strong> (this document)<br />

- GST <strong>Manual</strong><br />

Description of display or keypad functions<br />

- System description – pawl Device<br />

- Installation & Commissioning – FAX Modem<br />

- Quick Guide EAZ-256<br />

- Quick Guide EAZ-VFD<br />

- Quick Guide EAZ-LCD<br />

- Quick Guide FST-2-IRT<br />

- <strong>Manual</strong> for Fireman Mode<br />

- System description – Speech Output<br />

- System description – Attika Control<br />

- System description – Bank-Control<br />

- System description – Ramp-Drive<br />

- System description – Panel Test<br />

- System description – Safety curtain<br />

NEW LIFT is happy to provide this documentation on request. Please<br />

contact our marketing department.<br />

6 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


2 General Safety Regulations<br />

2.1 Standards and regulations applied<br />

2 General Safety Regulations<br />

2.1 Standards and regulations applied<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> must be in technically perfect condition and may only<br />

be used in accordance with regulations and in awareness of safety and<br />

risks. The “FST-2 Installation & Commissioning” manual as well as the<br />

relevant guidelines for the prevention of accidents and the guidelines of<br />

local power utilities must be observed.<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> complies with:<br />

- Regulation for lift systems<br />

(German regulation for lift systems, AufzV)<br />

- Safety regulations for the construction and installation of passenger<br />

lifts, building hoists and service lifts (DIN EN 81 Parts 1 and 2)<br />

- Technical regulations for lifts (TRA, Technische Regeln für Aufzüge)<br />

Operation of lift systems (TRA 007)<br />

Testing parts and components (TRA 101)<br />

Passenger lifts, building hoists and service lifts (TRA 200)<br />

- Regulations for the erection of power installations with rated voltages of<br />

up to 1kV (DIN VDE 0100)<br />

- Measures for contact voltage protection in the engine room (DIN EN<br />

60990)<br />

- Data sheet on safety measures during installation, maintenance and<br />

servicing or repair of lift systems (ZH 1/312)<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 7


2 General Safety Regulations<br />

2.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)<br />

2.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)<br />

An accredited inspection body has verified that the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> and<br />

its components comply with the standards, limits and test intensities<br />

according to EN 12015/1995 and EN 12016/1995.<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> and its components are:<br />

- resistant against electrostatic discharges<br />

(EN 61000-4-2/1995)<br />

- resistant against electrostatic fields<br />

(EN 61000-4-3/1997)<br />

- resistant against transient disturbances<br />

(EN 61000-4-4/1995)<br />

2.3 Handling electronic components<br />

The field strengths of electromagnetic disturbances radiated by the FST-2-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong> and its components do not exceed the permitted limits.<br />

(EN 55011/1997)<br />

Leave electronic components in their original packaging until installation.<br />

Touch a grounded piece of metal prior to opening the original packaging to<br />

prevent damage from static charges.<br />

All bus inputs and outputs not in use must be equipped with a terminal<br />

resistance (terminator).<br />

8 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

Fig. 3.1 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

The user interface of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> is located on the FST-2 main<br />

circuit board in the control cabinet of the lift system. The FST-2 user<br />

interface consists of front panel, LC-Display, keypad and LEDs.<br />

SAFETY CCT CLOSED<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 9


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Main screen<br />

Line A<br />

SAFETY CCT CLOSED<br />

###@###<br />

>AX<<br />

13:06:56<br />

00<br />

Safety circuit messages<br />

in Line A<br />

The LC-Display consists of four lines A, B, C and D with 20 digits each.<br />

After switching on and during normal operation, the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

displays the main screen.<br />

A Maximum active state of the safety circuit<br />

B Active state or error<br />

C Status of the lift system / diagnostic message<br />

D Data for current drive mode<br />

Line C has a special status. In normal mode (after switching on), it displays<br />

status messages (see “Status messages in line C” on page 13). When<br />

switching with key combination �+�+� it displays diagnostic<br />

messages, see “Diagnostic messages in line C” on page 14.<br />

Also see “Keypad functions” on page 32.<br />

Display Description<br />

CCT CLOSED The safety circuit is completely closed<br />

SAFETY<br />

(FST X14.1 & FST X14.2).<br />

MISSING The input “Safety circuit closed” has no power.<br />

SFTY-CLOSED<br />

Possible reasons:<br />

- Terminal FST X14.1 has no power (normally<br />

bridged with X14.2)<br />

- Relay K14 on the FST is faulty<br />

LOCK B OPEN The shaft door contact of door side B is<br />

DOOR<br />

interrupted (FST X14.2 and X14.3).<br />

LOCK A OPEN The shaft door contact of door side A is<br />

DOOR<br />

interrupted (FST X14.3 and X14.4).<br />

A OPEN The car door contact of door side A is<br />

DOOR<br />

interrupted (FST X14.4 and X14.5).<br />

B OPEN The car door contact of door side B is<br />

DOOR<br />

interrupted (FST X14.5 and X14.6).<br />

C OPEN The car door contact of door side C is<br />

DOOR<br />

interrupted (FST X14.6 and X14.7).<br />

DOOR OPEN A manual door contact is interrupted<br />

MANUAL<br />

(FST X14.6 and X14.7).<br />

END<br />

EMERGENCY<br />

SWITCH<br />

The top emergency end switch of an hydraulic<br />

lift is interrupted (FST X14.6 and X14.7).<br />

10 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Line B<br />

State messages in line B<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Display Description<br />

STOP An emergency switch in the shaft is interrupted<br />

EMERGENCY<br />

(terminals FST X14.7 and X14.8).<br />

STOP-CAR An emergency switch on the car is interrupted<br />

EMERGENCY<br />

(terminal FST X32.4).<br />

The messages DOOR C OPEN, MANUAL DOOR OPEN and EMERGENCY<br />

END SWITCH are triggered by the same safety circuit input of the FST-2<br />

(TC input: FST-2 X14.6) and exclude each other.<br />

Display Description<br />

LOW! The 24V supply of the FST-2 board (FST X1.1<br />

24V<br />

and X1.2) is below the permitted range of 24V -<br />

10%. Check power supply and wiring.<br />

CALLS OFF Landing control is blocked by a safety circuit<br />

LANDING<br />

interruption (interruption before terminal FST<br />

X32.4), line A EMERGENCY displays STOP,<br />

“EMERGENCY see STOP” on page 11.<br />

CONTROL OFF Landing control was switched off manually.<br />

LANDING<br />

Possible sources:<br />

� - key of the FST-2 keypad<br />

- Programmable input of an external RIO<br />

module<br />

- Input FST X1.14<br />

- Programmable input of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- Key switch on car panel (FPM input X4.34)<br />

- Key switch on landing panel (ADM input<br />

X3.12 / X3.13)<br />

A fire input is active. Possible reasons:<br />

FIREMAN<br />

- Fire input on landing call module (ADM input<br />

X3.12 / X3.13)<br />

- Programmable input of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- GST Group <strong>Controller</strong> (see GST <strong>Manual</strong>)<br />

TEST The manual end switch test is running, see test<br />

END-SWITCH<br />

menu.<br />

MON. TEST The manual test of the deceleration monitoring<br />

ES-SPEED<br />

function at the top and bottom limits is running,<br />

see test menu.<br />

The controller is in evacuation mode. Possible<br />

EVACUATION<br />

sources for the evacuation signal:<br />

- Programmable input of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- Programmable input of the GST Group<br />

<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- LMS over PAM protocol adapter module<br />

FAX The controller is in fax mode (see Installation &<br />

SEND<br />

Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 11


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Display Description<br />

OFF The controller was shut down. Possible<br />

LIFT<br />

sources:<br />

- Car light failure<br />

- Input “Car Light OFF”, FST X1.13<br />

- Programmable input/output of an external<br />

RIO module<br />

- Programmable input/output of the FST-2-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- Externally by the GST Group <strong>Controller</strong> or the<br />

LMS <strong>Lift</strong> Monitoring System<br />

MODE Fireman mode is activated. Possible sources:<br />

FIREMAN<br />

- Key switch on car panel (FPM X4.4)<br />

- Programmable input/output of the FST-2-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- The state was saved after a power failure and<br />

has been reconstructed. Fireman<br />

Function<br />

Reset must be used to reset this<br />

Mode<br />

state.<br />

- Key switch on landing panel (ADM input<br />

X3.12 / X3.13)<br />

- GST Group <strong>Controller</strong> (see GST <strong>Manual</strong>)<br />

TRANSFER<br />

FILE<br />

ACTIVE<br />

The controller is in remote data transmission<br />

mode to transfer files to a GST Group<br />

<strong>Controller</strong> or to a PC.<br />

The controller is in inspection mode (input FSM<br />

INSPECTION<br />

X22.2).<br />

Attention: Line A of the FST-2 display must<br />

EMERGENCY show STOP-CAR!<br />

- A calibration drive was started. The number of<br />

CALIBRATION<br />

remaining runs is displayed.<br />

The hinged car apron is open (due to a shaft<br />

APRON-OPEN!<br />

door interruption). Monitoring is done via a<br />

programmable input of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>.<br />

DRIVE ACTIVE The controller performs a learn drive.<br />

LEARN<br />

DRIVE-START The controller performs a learn drive.<br />

LEARN<br />

DRIV-�OK! Learn drive completed successfully.<br />

LEARN<br />

DRIVE-ABORT The learn drive was cancelled due to a fault.<br />

LEARN<br />

The reason is entered in the error list.<br />

CURTAIN The safety curtain replacing the car door was<br />

SAFETY<br />

interrupted. The contact is in the safety circuit<br />

instead of the car door contacts (see System<br />

description – Safety curtain).<br />

.. A runtime monitoring error has occurred. There<br />

DRM<br />

are different types of runtime monitoring<br />

functions that can shut down the lift.<br />

MODE The controller is in installation mode.<br />

INSTALLATION<br />

The controller performs an orientation drive to<br />

ORIENTATION<br />

the top or bottom limit after switching on (only<br />

when using INK – incremental positioning). The<br />

orientation drive can take place automatically or<br />

when the first call is placed.<br />

12 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Line C<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Display Description<br />

DRIVE ACTIVE The controller sends the car to a programmed<br />

PARK<br />

parking floor.<br />

LANDING A priority landing drive was triggered. Possible<br />

PRIORITY<br />

sources:<br />

- Key switch on landing panel (ADM input<br />

X3.12 / X3.13)<br />

- Programmable input of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- Programmable input of an external RIO<br />

module<br />

CAR A priority car drive was triggered. Possible<br />

PRIORITY<br />

sources:<br />

- Key switch on car panel (FPM input X4.37)<br />

- Automatically after a type Auto 2 priority<br />

landing drive.<br />

The controller is in auxiliary mode (input FST<br />

AUXILIARY<br />

X18.2).<br />

Attention: Line A of the FST-2 display must<br />

EMERGENCY show STOP!<br />

ACTIVE The hydraulic lift is sent to the lowest landing.<br />

HOMING<br />

ACTIVE The controller is in service mode, see test<br />

SERVICE<br />

menu.<br />

REQUIRED! One of the service counters has exceeded a set<br />

SERVICE<br />

limit.<br />

STOP The controller was stopped via the FST-2<br />

SYSTEM<br />

menu.<br />

The overload input on the FSM or on a<br />

OVERLOAD<br />

programmable input is active.<br />

ERROR - A user error has occurred. The number of the<br />

USER<br />

error is displayed.<br />

MODE The controller is in VIP mode. Possible sources<br />

VIP<br />

VIP mode:<br />

- LMS over PAM protocol adapter module<br />

- Programmable input of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

- FPM input X4.34 on car panel<br />

LOAD The full load input of the FSM is active.<br />

FULL<br />

Status messages in line C Line C is divided and displays one of the following status messages in the<br />

left and in the right part. For scrolling the status messages in the left part<br />

use the key combination �+�, for the right part use the key combination<br />

�+�.<br />

The door positions marked with A also apply to doors B and C.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 13


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

<br />

>A<<br />

Status Display Description<br />

Car doors Door A completely open<br />

Door A closed<br />

Door A is opening<br />

<br />

Door A is closing<br />

->A>


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Display Description<br />

00000 Diagnosis of absolute value encoder<br />

LIK-Errs:00000<br />

function (see page 16), this display is<br />

irrelevant when using incremental<br />

positioning.<br />

Real-time display of increments counted by<br />

ENC:10000000[989680]<br />

the encoder on plug X2. The counted<br />

increments together with the covered<br />

distance can help when calculating the<br />

required Resolution.<br />

KO KU ZB Current state of the solenoid switches with<br />

Gray=43210<br />

incremental positioning, see page 16<br />

F1=00 F2=00 Current state of the FSM for door A, see<br />

Door-A:<br />

page 16<br />

F1=00 F2=00 Current state of the FSM for door B, see<br />

Door-B:<br />

page 16<br />

F1=00 F2=00 Current state of the FSM for door C, see<br />

Door-C:<br />

page 16<br />

VST=0000 Internal motor state (see page 19) and<br />

Motor=00<br />

states of the pre-selection contact outputs<br />

(see page 20)<br />

Real=00 Generated and actual position messages<br />

Pos:Virt=0b<br />

from the car, see page 20<br />

State of the safety circuit, see page 22<br />

SHK=SABCN<br />

Call=00 Internal NEW LIFT diagnostic message<br />

Mgr1:Drv=00<br />

B=00 C=00 Internal NEW LIFT diagnostic message<br />

Mgr2:A=02<br />

VT=V2 Next possible stop (NextPoss) that can<br />

NextPoss=ff<br />

be approached and the set speed (VT), see<br />

page 22<br />

EXIN1=EGALPUDR State of input EXIN1, see page 22<br />

Port<br />

EXIO2=76543210 State of input EXIN2, see page 23<br />

Port<br />

H8IN1=ZBSMVO State of input H8IN1, see page 23<br />

Port<br />

L=1 V=0 K=0 State of outputs on FSM X8 and X19, see<br />

FSM-X6:<br />

page 23<br />

00 00 00 00 Source of the special drive signals fireman,<br />

SRC:00<br />

fireman mode, landing control OFF, lift off<br />

and service mode, see page 24<br />

255% E0 F0 O0 State of the weight sensor, see page 25<br />

LWE:<br />

State of the project specific parts of the<br />

Proj.Status=........<br />

program (internal)<br />

m1 c0 f0 Mb005 State of the PC-Card slot, see page 26<br />

PC:s0<br />

In=005 Out=002 Incoming and outgoing data packets of the<br />

Pkt\s<br />

FST-<strong>Controller</strong> in [packets/sec]<br />

0000000 P=[00] State of the pawl device, see page 26<br />

ASV:<br />

msgs=00123 Number of message packets from the FSM<br />

FSM<br />

car control module to the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 15


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Absolute value encoder<br />

function<br />

LIK-Errs:00000 00000<br />

State of incremental<br />

positioning<br />

Gray=43210 KO KU ZB<br />

The two numbers on the display show the number of encoder failures since the last<br />

activation of the system. The left number shows the different values resulting from<br />

double scanning, the right number shows the number of failed plausibility checks.<br />

Sporadic errors are compensated by the FST Software and can be tolerated. A<br />

continuous increase of one of these values indicates an encoder or cable failure.<br />

Left number:<br />

Right number:<br />

Display Description<br />

00000<br />

or constant value<br />

Communication between the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

and the absolute value encoder is working<br />

correctly. Double scanning to suppress electric<br />

interference does not show any differences.<br />

constantly rising value Double scanning to suppress electric<br />

interference does show differences. There is<br />

electric interference on the connection cable<br />

between FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> and encoder. Check<br />

connection cable and inform your NEW LIFT<br />

Hotline.<br />

Display Description<br />

The position values of the absolute value<br />

00000<br />

encoder are plausible (are within the regular<br />

shaft). There are no invalid jumps in the<br />

position value.<br />

The position values of the absolute value<br />

RANGE<br />

encoder are not plausible (are outside the<br />

regular shaft). Check direction of rotation of the<br />

encoder and commission the linear positioning<br />

function, see “Installation and Commissioning<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>”.<br />

There are invalid jumps in the position value.<br />

DELTA<br />

Absolute value encoder faulty.<br />

Code Description<br />

43210 State of Gray-coded pre-limit switches for high-speed lifts (optional)<br />

KO Correction switch top (KO) active<br />

KU Correction switch bottom (Ku) active<br />

ZB Zone switch B active<br />

16 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


States of the FSM car<br />

control module<br />

Door-A: F1=00 F2=00<br />

Fig. 3.2 Hexadecimal encoding of an 8-bit register<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

State bytes F1 and F2 describe the states of eight functions each in realtime<br />

(8 bits, hexadecimal code). Hexadecimal bytes are coded number by<br />

number. Each number has a decimal value according to the following table:<br />

Hexadecimal<br />

number<br />

Decimal<br />

value<br />

0<br />

0<br />

1<br />

1<br />

2<br />

2<br />

3<br />

3<br />

4<br />

4<br />

5<br />

5<br />

6<br />

6<br />

7<br />

7<br />

8<br />

8<br />

9<br />

9<br />

10<br />

a<br />

11<br />

b<br />

12<br />

c<br />

13<br />

d<br />

14<br />

e<br />

15<br />

f<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 17<br />

digit<br />

digit


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Each number codes four functions (bits) of the F1/F2 table with its decimal<br />

value. The decimal value of the number corresponds to the sum of the<br />

values of the activated functions according to the following tables.<br />

F1 = Bit Number Value Setting Byte F1<br />

0<br />

1 active FSM car control module configured<br />

1 Number 1<br />

2 active Door locked<br />

2<br />

(right number)<br />

4 active Door reversing<br />

3 8 Door completely<br />

open<br />

Limit switch “door open”<br />

4<br />

1 Door completely Limit switch “door closed”<br />

Number 2<br />

closed<br />

5<br />

6<br />

(left number)<br />

2<br />

4<br />

active<br />

active<br />

Photocell interrupted<br />

Reversing contact<br />

7 8 active Minimum load input*<br />

F2 = Bit Number Value Setting Byte F2<br />

0<br />

1 on Car light sensor*<br />

1 Number 1<br />

2 active Inspection signal “fast”<br />

2<br />

(right number)<br />

4 active Inspection signal “down”<br />

3 8 active Inspection signal “up”<br />

4<br />

1 active Inspection signal “ON”<br />

5 Number 2<br />

2 active Door closing motor<br />

6<br />

(left number)<br />

4 active Door opening motor<br />

7 8 active Door ready for drive<br />

SAFETY CCT CLOSED<br />

F1=6c F2=21<br />

Door-A:<br />

13:06:<br />

00<br />

* Signal only relevant for door versions A and B.<br />

Example:<br />

State byte F1 = 6c and state byte F2 = 21<br />

This results in the following hexadecimal numbers:<br />

F1:<br />

Number 1 = “c” (decimal = 12)<br />

Number 2 = “6” (decimal = 6)<br />

F2:<br />

Number 1 = “1” (decimal = 1)<br />

Number 2 = “2” (decimal = 2)<br />

The decimal numbers are calculated from the following values:<br />

F1:<br />

Number 1 = 12 = 8 + 4<br />

18 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Internal motor states<br />

Motor=00<br />

Internal states of the preselection<br />

relays<br />

Vst=0000<br />

Number 2 = 6 = 4 + 2<br />

F2:<br />

Number 1 = 1<br />

Number 2 = 2<br />

These values result in the following active bits:<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

F1:<br />

Number 1 = 8 + 4<br />

=>according to the table for F1 (Number 1) bits 2 and 3 are active<br />

=>the door is reversing and limit switch “open” has switched<br />

Number 2 = 4 + 2<br />

=>according to the table for F1 (Number 2) bits 5 and 6 are active<br />

=>the photocell is interrupted and the reversing contact has<br />

switched<br />

F2:<br />

Number 1 = 1<br />

=>according to the table for F2 (Number 1) bit 0 is active<br />

=>the door is reversing and limit switch “open” has switched<br />

Number 2 = 2<br />

=>according to the table for F2 (Number 2) bit 5 is active<br />

=>the car light sensor is active and the door motor is closing<br />

Internal motor states are coded according to the following table:<br />

Motor = Value motor state<br />

Motor ready<br />

00<br />

Motor starting<br />

01<br />

Motor running<br />

02<br />

03 Motor approaching stop position<br />

04 Motor braking<br />

05 Motor stopping<br />

digit<br />

digit<br />

digit 3<br />

digit<br />

4<br />

Fig. 3.3 Hexadecimal encoding of a 16-bit register<br />

8-11<br />

12-15<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 19


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Position messages<br />

Pos: Virt=0b Real=00<br />

The four digit display provides a real-time description of the states of the<br />

pre-selection relays in hexadecimal code according to the following table.<br />

Hexadecimal values are coded number by number as described in<br />

page 17.<br />

VST = Bit Number Value Setting pre-selection relay<br />

0<br />

1 active Output FST K0<br />

1<br />

Number 1<br />

2 active Output FST K1<br />

2<br />

(right number)<br />

4 active Output FST K2<br />

3 8 active Output FST K3<br />

4<br />

1 active Output FST K4<br />

5 Number 2 2 active Output FST K5<br />

6 4 active Output FST K6<br />

7 8 active Output FST K7<br />

8<br />

1 active Output FST K8<br />

9 Number 3 2 active Output FST K9<br />

10 4 active Output FST K10<br />

11 8 active Output FST K11<br />

12<br />

1 active Output FST K12<br />

13 Number 4 2 active Zone signal B<br />

14<br />

15<br />

(left number)<br />

4<br />

8<br />

active<br />

active<br />

Safety circuit bypass FST K20<br />

Enable zone switching FST K21<br />

The generated (virtual) and actual (real) position messages of the car<br />

describe the states of eight switches each (8 bits, hexadecimal code) in<br />

real-time according to the following table. Hexadecimal values are coded<br />

number by number as described in page 17.<br />

Virt = Bit Number Value Setting virtual position<br />

0<br />

1 active Level (A and B)<br />

1 Number 1 2 active Level (A and B) with motor stopped<br />

2<br />

3<br />

(right number)<br />

4<br />

8<br />

active<br />

active<br />

Approach area<br />

Zone switch B (FST K23)<br />

4<br />

1 active Relevelling “up”<br />

5 Number 2 2 active Relevelling “down”<br />

6<br />

(left number)<br />

4 active Enable zone switching (FST K21)<br />

7 8 Not assigned<br />

20 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Real = Bit Number Value Setting real position<br />

0<br />

1 active Zone message (FST K22 & K23 active at the same time)<br />

1 Number 1 2 active Correction switch top KO (INK)<br />

2<br />

(right number)<br />

4 active Correction switch bottom KU (INK)<br />

3 8 active Level bottom LB (INK, optional)<br />

4<br />

1 active Level top LT (INK, optional)<br />

5 Number 2 2 active Brake monitoring (FST X1.19 & X1.20)<br />

6<br />

(left number)<br />

4 active Motor monitoring (FST X1.22)<br />

7 8 active Zone switch B (with INK)<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 21


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

States of the safety circuit<br />

Shk=SABCN<br />

Next possible stop<br />

NextPoss=ff<br />

Current set speed<br />

Vt=V2<br />

Input EXIN1<br />

Port EXIN1=EGALPDUR<br />

The state of the safety circuit is coded according to the following table:<br />

Code Description<br />

Locking device open<br />

S<br />

Door A open<br />

A<br />

Door B open<br />

B<br />

Car door C (revolving door, emergency end switch top) open<br />

C<br />

Emergency stop<br />

N<br />

The next possible stop that can be approached by the car is coded with<br />

hexadecimal values according to the following table:<br />

Code NextPoss=<br />

Description<br />

All floors possible (car is at rest)<br />

ff<br />

No further floor possible (when decelerating)<br />

fe<br />

Next possible stop = code (hexadecimal)<br />

00..3f<br />

The current set speed of the motor is coded according to the following<br />

table:<br />

Code Vt=<br />

Description<br />

Drive speed 1 .. 8 (for standard drives)<br />

V1..V8<br />

ve Approach speed<br />

Fast inspection speed<br />

Vi<br />

Relevelling speed<br />

Vn<br />

Input EXIN1 displays the states of the controller inputs according to the<br />

following table:<br />

R<br />

U<br />

D<br />

Bit Terminal Setting Description<br />

FST X18.2 active Auxiliary control ON<br />

FST X18.3 active Auxiliary control UP<br />

FST X18.4 active Auxiliary control DOWN<br />

P<br />

L FST X1.14 active Car light OFF<br />

A<br />

G<br />

E<br />

FST X1.15 active Landing control OFF<br />

active GST found<br />

active Alarm<br />

22 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Input EXIO2<br />

Port EXIO2=76543210<br />

Input H8IN1<br />

Port H8IN1=ZBSMUO<br />

FSM-X6<br />

FSM-X6: L=1 V=0 K=0<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Input/output EXIO2 displays the states of the programmable inputs and<br />

outputs according to the following table:<br />

Bit Terminal Setting Description<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

FST X1.4 active Programmable input/output 0<br />

FST X1.5 active Programmable input/output 1<br />

FST X1.6 active Programmable input/output 2<br />

FST X1.7 active Programmable input/output 3<br />

FST X1.8 active Programmable input/output 4<br />

FST X1.9 active Programmable input/output 5<br />

FST X1.10 active Programmable input/output 6<br />

FST X1.11 active Programmable input/output 7<br />

Input H8IN1 displays the inputs of the drive processor according to the<br />

following table:<br />

O<br />

U<br />

M<br />

S<br />

B<br />

Z<br />

Bit Terminal Setting Description<br />

0 Not assigned<br />

1 Not assigned<br />

FSM X13.1 active Correction switch top “KO”<br />

FSM X13.3 active Correction switch bottom “KU”<br />

FST X1.22 active Motor monitoring<br />

FST X1.23 active Standstill monitoring<br />

FST X1.19/20 active Brake monitoring<br />

FST X13.9 active Zone message<br />

The FSM-X6 display shows the states of the following outputs of the car<br />

control module:<br />

L=<br />

0<br />

1<br />

Code Terminal Setting car light<br />

FSM X19.1 active Car light OFF<br />

FSM X19.1 not active Car light ON<br />

V=<br />

0<br />

1<br />

Code Terminal Setting car ventilator<br />

FSM X19.4 not active Car ventilator OFF<br />

FSM X19.4 active Car ventilator ON<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 23


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Source of special drive<br />

signals<br />

SRC:00 00 00 00<br />

Code Terminal Setting K= door lock solenoid<br />

0 FSM X8.3 not active Door lock solenoid released<br />

1 FSM X8.3 active Door lock solenoid activated<br />

The special drive signals fire, fireman mode, landing control OFF, lift off<br />

and service mode can be activated by different signal sources (e.g. ADM,<br />

FPM etc.). The sources are displayed as follows:<br />

Fig. 3.4 Signals sources of SRC display<br />

Coding of the source display:<br />

Code Code for fire signal<br />

01 ADM landing call module<br />

02 Programmable input/output of the FST-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

04 GST Group <strong>Controller</strong><br />

Code Code for fireman mode signal<br />

01 FPM car panel module, X4.4<br />

02 Programmable input/output of the FST-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

The state was saved after a power failure and has been<br />

04<br />

reconstructed.<br />

ADM landing call module<br />

08<br />

10 GST Group <strong>Controller</strong><br />

Source of “Service Mode”<br />

Source of “<strong>Lift</strong> Off”<br />

Source of “Landing Control Off”<br />

Source of “Fireman Mode”<br />

Source of “Fire Mode”<br />

24 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Weight sensor<br />

LWE: 255% E0 F0 O0<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Code Code for landing control OFF signal<br />

� key of the FST keypad<br />

01<br />

Programmable input/output of an external RIO module<br />

02<br />

04 Input “Landing control OFF”, FST X1.15<br />

08 Programmable input/output of the FST-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

FPM car panel module, X4.34<br />

10<br />

ADM landing call module<br />

20<br />

40 Push button mode (see “Special call mode” on page 135)<br />

Code Source for lift off signal<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> off after a car light failure<br />

01<br />

02 Input “Car light OFF”, FST X1.14<br />

Programmable input/output of an external CUS module or ADM<br />

04<br />

Programmable input/output of the FST-<strong>Controller</strong> or external RIO<br />

08<br />

module<br />

External by the GST Group <strong>Controller</strong> or the LMS lift monitoring<br />

10<br />

system<br />

Code Source for service mode signal<br />

External via LMS lift monitoring system<br />

01<br />

02 TEST MENU – Service Mode ON<br />

04 Programmable input/output of the FST-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

The state of the weight sensor inputs and the loading level of the car when<br />

using analogue weight sensors is displayed as follows:<br />

Fig. 3.5 State of the weight sensor<br />

State of Input “Overload”, FSM X5.4<br />

State of Input “Full-Load”, FSM X5.3<br />

State of Input “Minimum Load”, FSM X5.2<br />

Loading Level of the Car in %<br />

(when using analogue weight sensor)<br />

“0”: Input not active<br />

“1”: Input active<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 25


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

PC-Card<br />

PC:s0 m1 c0 f0 Mb005<br />

State of pawl<br />

device<br />

ASV: 0000000 P=[00]<br />

Code Description<br />

No PC-Card inserted<br />

s0<br />

s1 PC-Card inserted – card type not detected<br />

PC-Card inserted – card type detected / card OK<br />

s2<br />

PC-Card inserted – card type not detected / error<br />

s3<br />

m0 PC-Card memory type unknown<br />

m1 Card type: static RAM<br />

m2 Card type: flash memory<br />

CIS memory: no CIS found<br />

c0<br />

CIS status: CIS OK<br />

c1<br />

f0 Flash type: PC-Card unknown / unusable<br />

Flash type: AMD A28F040 – 512kB memory module<br />

f1<br />

Flash type: INTEL I28f016 – 2MB memory module<br />

f2<br />

Size of memory storage in 0.1 MB steps<br />

Mb<br />

The state of the pawl device is coded as follows:<br />

ASV: .......<br />

0<br />

Bit Setting Description<br />

(right)<br />

active Pump for bolt control ON<br />

1 active Valve “extend bolt” activated<br />

2 active Valve “retract bolt” activated<br />

3 active End switch “bolt extended” active<br />

4 active End switch “bolt retracted” active<br />

5<br />

6 active Input “re-pumping” active<br />

(left)<br />

active Input “car bottomed” active<br />

P=[..]<br />

0 Standstill<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

4<br />

5<br />

6<br />

7<br />

0<br />

1<br />

2<br />

Digit<br />

1 (right)<br />

Code Description<br />

1 (right) Main contactors ON, waiting for star-delta start-up<br />

1 (right) <strong>Lift</strong> car (approx. 30mm / 1 3/16")<br />

1 (right) Motor run-on active<br />

1 (right) Waiting for bolts to extend or retract<br />

1 (right) Bolts extended or retracted completely<br />

1 (right) Waiting for input “car bottomed”<br />

1 (right) Delay after stop<br />

2 (left) No bolt movement<br />

2 (left) Bolts are retracting<br />

2 (left) Bolts are extending<br />

26 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Line D<br />

Drive mode messages<br />

in line D<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

P=[..]<br />

3<br />

4<br />

Digit Code Description<br />

2 (left) Re-pumping active<br />

2 (left) Error in bolt control<br />

T<br />

Column Display Description<br />

1 Auto test drive active<br />

S<br />

s<br />

{<br />

}<br />

10<br />

[13]<br />

[13<br />

13]<br />

X13<br />

13X<br />

G<br />

g<br />

R<br />

F<br />

10:44:12<br />

2<br />

No serial connection to the frequency converter<br />

(FST-2 X11)<br />

Data transmission to the frequency converter<br />

via serial connection is faulty (FST-2 X11)<br />

Direction display UP<br />

3-4 Current floor of car<br />

5-8<br />

Direction display DOWN<br />

Car and landing call to target floor<br />

9<br />

Car call to target floor<br />

Landing call to target floor<br />

Car control blocked<br />

Landing control blocked<br />

Not assigned<br />

10 FST-2 is integrated in a GST Group <strong>Controller</strong><br />

11<br />

FST-2 is integrated in a GST Group <strong>Controller</strong><br />

but communication with the GST is faulty<br />

Flashes when recording data on the PC card<br />

12 Not assigned<br />

13-20<br />

Card is cleared<br />

Current time of the FST-2<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 27


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

Information texts<br />

When triggering actions in the FST menu, information texts may be<br />

displayed. They contain information about the results of the action.<br />

Display Description<br />

EMERGENCY OPERATION<br />

*!!<br />

!!*<br />

The controller is in emergency operation mode. Drives are not possible.<br />

Emergency operation is activated by pressing the � key while switching the<br />

system on.<br />

STUCK :... The landing call from the specified floor and door side is permanently activated<br />

ADM<br />

(is stuck).<br />

unconfigured! A landing call module connected to the shaft bus is not configured. Inform your<br />

ADM<br />

NEW LIFT Hotline!<br />

Reject CODE: A landing call was placed but not carried out. The code displays the reason for<br />

ADR<br />

the suppression, see “ADR Reject codes:” on page 30.<br />

INHIBIT ON! Mutual start-up blocking via the LMS bus is active. Starting will be delayed until<br />

DRIVE<br />

the networked systems have completed their acceleration phases.<br />

wait! The triggered action has not been completed. Please wait!<br />

Please<br />

SENT OK! A status fax was sent successfully via the modem interface.<br />

FAX\SMS<br />

-> GST! A fax/sms (text message) is sent to the group controller where it will be sent via<br />

FAX\SMS<br />

the FAX-modem.<br />

NOT SENT! Transmission of a status fax via the modem interface was aborted. Check<br />

FAX\SMS<br />

modem and telephone connection. MAIN MENU - Configuration<br />

See<br />

Modem\Fax\LMS<br />

-<br />

NOT FOUND! The inserted PC-Card does not contain the file(s) required for the triggered<br />

FILE<br />

action.<br />

software update The software of the FST-2 is updated with a PC-Card. The progress in [%] is<br />

FST<br />

displayed in line C.<br />

UPDATE COMPLETE! The software update of the GST Group <strong>Controller</strong> is complete.<br />

GST<br />

CAR ACTIVE... Soft priority car is waiting for standstill after the pending car call. See MAIN<br />

PRIO<br />

- Configuration - Prio-landing\car.<br />

MENUE<br />

Reject CODE: A car call was placed but not carried out. The code displays the reason for the<br />

IDR<br />

suppression, see “IDR Reject codes:” on page 30.<br />

abort! The calibration drive was aborted. Check function of connected drive speeds.<br />

Calibration<br />

Locate reason for drive abortion in the error list.<br />

SIGNAL The car is on the top floor and the correction top signal is missing (only when<br />

NO<br />

using INK – incremental positioning). Check function of KO switch. Check<br />

settings MAIN MENUE - Positioning - Increm.Positng. -<br />

in<br />

KO\KU-level.<br />

SIGNAL The car is on the bottom floor and the correction bottom signal is missing (only<br />

NO<br />

when using INK – incremental positioning). Check function of KU switch. Check<br />

settings MAIN MENUE - Positioning - Increm.Positng. -<br />

in<br />

KO\KU-level.<br />

TRANSFER ERR! An error has occurred during copying of the controller configuration.<br />

CONFIG<br />

CONFIG TRANSFER OK! <strong>Controller</strong> configuration copied successfully.<br />

CONFIG[D] CORRUPT! A parameter of the drive configuration is not plausible. Change a parameter in<br />

MAIN MENU - Drive and undo the change again. The information text<br />

disappears after saving the settings.<br />

28 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Display Description<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

CORRUPT! A parameter of the system configuration is not plausible. Change a parameter<br />

CONFIG[S]<br />

MAIN MENU - Configuration in and undo the change again. The<br />

information text disappears after saving the settings.<br />

DRIVE FAILURE! The started learn drive was not successful. Check function of signals zone B,<br />

LEARN<br />

correction bottom and correction top.<br />

START FAILURE! The started learn drive was aborted due to the car not moving even with pre-<br />

LEARN<br />

selection active.<br />

STARTED! A DRM-test was triggered.<br />

DRM-TEST<br />

DRM-TEST FINISHED! The DRM-test was completed successfully.<br />

NUISANCE DETECT! The car nuisance protection function has triggered. See MAIN MENU -<br />

CAR<br />

- Anti Nuisance.<br />

Configuration<br />

IN THE ZONE! The started learn drive cannot be completed because the car is not in the door<br />

NOT<br />

zone. Check function of zone B signal and settings MAIN MENU -<br />

in<br />

- Increm.Positng. - ZoneB-Level.<br />

Positioning<br />

IN FLOOR-0! The started learn drive cannot be completed because the car is not on the<br />

NOT<br />

lowest floor (check correction switch bottom, KU).<br />

FROM END FLOOR! The car is at an end floor. The triggered end switch test cannot be started from<br />

NOT<br />

this floor.<br />

An alarm button was operated or is faulty (see wiring diagram).<br />

CALL<br />

EMERGENCY<br />

ACTIVATED!<br />

FROM END FLOOR! The triggered drive test can only be started from an end floor.<br />

ONLY<br />

REMOVED! The inserted PC-Card was removed from slot X8.<br />

PC-CARD<br />

FLASH TYPE?? The memory type of the inserted PC-Card is unknown. The PC-Card cannot be<br />

PC-CARD<br />

used.<br />

EMPTY! The inserted PC-Card was cleared successfully.<br />

PC-CARD<br />

LOW BATTERY! The battery voltage of the inserted PC-Card is too low. Change battery!<br />

PC-CARD<br />

OK! The inserted PC-Card has been recognized by the controller and can be used.<br />

PC-CARD<br />

TYPE????! The inserted PC-Card is not recognized by the controller and cannot be used.<br />

PC-CARD<br />

Update File Updating the software. The inserted PC-Card is checked for update files.<br />

Checking<br />

RECORDING RESTART! An already started recording was restarted.<br />

RECORDING STOPPED! Recording is stopped.<br />

RECORDING NEWSTART! A new recording is started.<br />

LEVEL! The supervisor level is accessed with a master password. It enables setting<br />

SUPERVISOR<br />

hidden parameters.<br />

FILE FOUND The file required for the software update was found on the PC-Card. The<br />

UPDATE<br />

software is updated.<br />

COMPLETE! The software update of the LON module was completed successfully.<br />

UPDATE<br />

TO RESET... Automatic RESET after changing basic parameters (e.g. Drive type). This<br />

WAITING<br />

may take a few seconds.<br />

SLIPPAGE!! During the last drive of the learn drive, hysteresis of the connected solenoid<br />

EXCESSIVE<br />

switches KO, KU and zone B was detected (only when using INK – incremental<br />

positioning). If a value greater than 10 mm is measured this message is<br />

displayed. Hysteresis will be limited to 10 mm automatically.<br />

Nudging (forced closure) of the car door is activated. Photocell and reversing<br />

DOOR-NUDGING!<br />

contacts are ignored. MAIN MENU - Doors - Doors<br />

See<br />

- Photocell and MAIN MENU - Doors - Doors<br />

Selective<br />

- Nudge Time.<br />

Selective<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 29


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

ADR Reject codes:<br />

IDR Reject codes:<br />

Code Description<br />

5 Call from an unconfigured ADM<br />

6 Landing calls are currently blocked<br />

20 The call is from an unregistered door side or floor (see call menu)<br />

21 The call is currently blocked (programmable input)<br />

22 The call is currently blocked (LMS remote monitoring)<br />

24 The call is stuck<br />

Control is a push button control (not collective) and the lift is<br />

25<br />

currently occupied<br />

The call is currently blocked (MA35 control)<br />

26<br />

Code Description<br />

Anti nuisance (car is empty)<br />

10<br />

11 Anti nuisance (maximum number of car calls exceeded)<br />

20 The call is from an unregistered door side or floor (see call menu)<br />

21 The call is currently blocked (programmable input)<br />

The call is currently blocked (LMS remote monitoring)<br />

22<br />

The call is stuck<br />

24<br />

The call is currently blocked (Attika control)<br />

25<br />

Control is a push button control (not collective) and the lift is<br />

26<br />

currently occupied<br />

The call is currently blocked (MA35 control)<br />

27<br />

28 The call is currently blocked (ramp control)<br />

30 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Information page<br />

FST-2 Information -<br />

-<br />

Ver.:14-16<br />

HW<br />

VER.:V1.100-0350<br />

SW<br />

:18\05\2005<br />

Messages in<br />

lines B, C and D<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.1 LC-Display and messages<br />

The information page contains important information on the individual<br />

configuration of your FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>.<br />

It can be accessed with key combination �+� and closed with �. The<br />

�/� keys are used to navigate through the information page.<br />

A Information page<br />

B Hardware version 12-16 of FST-2<br />

C Software version V1.100-0350 of FST-2<br />

D Release date of the software version<br />

Display Description<br />

VER.:14-16 Hardware version of the FST-2 board<br />

HW<br />

Software version with release date<br />

Ver.:V1.100-0350<br />

SW<br />

:18\05\2005<br />

Ver:0104 Software version of the operating system<br />

Boot<br />

Ver: FSM00125 Software version of the FSM car control<br />

FSM<br />

module. If no software version is displayed<br />

here there is no bus connection to the FSM.<br />

Ver: FPM00128 Software version of the FPM car panel<br />

FPM<br />

module. If no software version is displayed<br />

here there is no bus connection to the FPM.<br />

Internal identification of the controller. The<br />

<strong>Lift</strong>ID:A<br />

ID displayed here must correspond to the<br />

jumper settings of FSM and FPM.<br />

Neuron-ID..<br />

00 22 C1 fb 00<br />

01<br />

SystemID..<br />

bench<br />

Test<br />

number..<br />

Factory<br />

RC9900234<br />

Unique ID for identification of the FST-2-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong><br />

System location or name<br />

Order number of the individual lift system<br />

Start:12\07\05 08:23 Date and time of activation<br />

:12\07\05 10:23 Date and time of last calibration drive<br />

CAL<br />

14:03 Start date and time of the current statistics<br />

STATS:27\07\05<br />

recording<br />

12:05 Date and time of the last change of a<br />

Cfg:12\07\05<br />

parameter in the FST menu<br />

12:06 Date and time of the current backup copy in<br />

CfgBk:12\07\05<br />

the internal buffer<br />

12:07 Date and time of the last reset of the error<br />

Err:12\07\05<br />

list<br />

Current security level of the FST-2<br />

Sec.Level:1<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 31


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.2 Keypad functions<br />

3.2 Keypad functions<br />

Frequency converter with DCP interface<br />

When switching on<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> is operated using seven keys. The keys have<br />

different functions in the different displays.<br />

�<br />

�<br />

Operation and parametrising of frequency converters with<br />

DCP interface can be done from the FST-2 menu (FST X11<br />

connected). The display of the frequency converter can be<br />

simulated on the FST-2 display by pressing the � key once.<br />

The FST-2 keys provide access to the functions of the<br />

frequency converter. The FST-2 display returns to standard<br />

mode by pressing the � key again.<br />

Pressing and holding key � during the switch-on sequence of<br />

the FST-2 starts emergency operation. In emergency<br />

operation no drives are possible. Emergency operation is<br />

required if the FST-2 cannot be switched on in normal mode<br />

due to a malfunction. The complete FST menu and the PC-<br />

Card functions are active in emergency mode!<br />

32 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Main screen<br />

SAFETY CCT CLOSED<br />

###@###<br />

>A<<br />

13:06:56<br />

00<br />

Main menu and test menu<br />

MENU<br />

MAIN<br />

><br />

Drive<br />

Configuration<br />

>Positioning<br />

><br />

Clock setting<br />

13:45:01<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�+�<br />

�+�<br />

�+�<br />

�+�<br />

�+�<br />

�+�+�<br />

Set car call to top floor<br />

Set car call to bottom floor<br />

3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.2 Keypad functions<br />

Switch landing control on and off (switch function)<br />

Open test menu<br />

Open main menu<br />

Press before switching on and hold until the start-up sequence<br />

of the FST-2 is completed: Emergency operation is activated,<br />

see “*!! EMERGENCY OPERATION !!*” on page 28.<br />

Set car call to next floor up<br />

Set car call to next floor down<br />

Scroll through the right status messages in line C<br />

Scroll through the left status messages in line C<br />

Display information page<br />

Toggle diagnostic messages in line C on and off<br />

�+�+�+� <strong>Controller</strong> RESET<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

Move cursor up<br />

Move cursor down<br />

Exit submenu<br />

Change menu level<br />

Select submenu / menu item<br />

Increase value<br />

Decrease value<br />

Move cursor left<br />

Move cursor right<br />

Confirm settings<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 33


3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> user interface<br />

3.3 LEDs<br />

Error list<br />

[00037\00040]<br />

ERROR<br />

10:18:26 [012]<br />

28.09<br />

close failed<br />

Door<br />

03 V00 R01 I00<br />

FLOOR:<br />

Information page<br />

FST-2 Information -<br />

-<br />

Ver.:12-16<br />

HW<br />

VER.:V1.100-0026<br />

SW<br />

:18\05\1999<br />

3.3 LEDs<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�+�<br />

�+�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�<br />

Switch to 2nd to 8th information byte in line D<br />

Switch to initial display in line D<br />

To previous error message<br />

To next error message<br />

Scroll one line up<br />

Scroll one line down<br />

Back to main screen<br />

Three LEDs on the front panel of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> display the device<br />

status.<br />

�<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Reason Action<br />

RUN green on The power supply is on<br />

The hardware of the FST-2-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong> is working correctly<br />

off No power Check the 24V power supply of the FST-<br />

2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

The hardware of the FST-2-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong> is faulty<br />

Inform your NEW LIFT Hotline!<br />

STATUS green on The drive processor is working<br />

correctly<br />

flashing Landing control OFF switches landing control back on<br />

off Fault in drive processor Inform your NEW LIFT Hotline!<br />

ERROR red on Drive not possible Line B shows the reason of the error. A<br />

drive is only possible after the error has<br />

been corrected.<br />

flashing One or more errors were added to<br />

the error list<br />

off There is no error or event<br />

The ERROR LED is off after the error list<br />

has been called up.<br />

34 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4 Technical data<br />

4 Technical data<br />

The FST-2 <strong>Lift</strong> <strong>Controller</strong> from NEW LIFT is the result of many years of<br />

product experience in the area of lift system controller design and close cooperation<br />

with various component manufacturers, technical regulatory<br />

authorities and of course our customers.<br />

The lift control system consists of the FST-2 main circuit board with user<br />

interface, electronic assemblies and cables. The individual components of<br />

the FST-2 <strong>Lift</strong> <strong>Controller</strong> are described, and dimensions, jumpers, LEDs,<br />

terminals and plugs are explained. All FST-2 components described in this<br />

manual are shown in the “FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> component overview (bus<br />

plan)” on page 36.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 35


4 Technical data<br />

4.1 Component overview – bus plan<br />

4.1 Component overview – bus plan<br />

green<br />

( 10)<br />

blue<br />

( 7)<br />

blue<br />

( 7)<br />

blue<br />

( 7)<br />

blue<br />

( 7)<br />

blue<br />

( 7)<br />

blue<br />

( 7)<br />

FST-A<br />

A B X 4 Opt.<br />

ADM-S<br />

ADM-S<br />

ADM-S<br />

ADM-S<br />

ADM-S<br />

ADM-S<br />

ADM-S<br />

Fig. 4.1 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> component overview (bus plan)<br />

NEW LIFT provides an overview of the individual components known as<br />

“bus plan” that is supplied with the circuit documentation of each lift system.<br />

For each electronic assembly, installation site, associated bus and the<br />

respective LON bus cable lengths are specified in the bus plan. Each<br />

electronic assembly is clearly labelled on the circuit board. Using this<br />

labelling, the individual components can be identified on the bus plan.<br />

S/<br />

0/<br />

A/<br />

6/<br />

A<br />

S/<br />

0/<br />

A/<br />

5/<br />

A<br />

S/<br />

0/<br />

A/<br />

4/<br />

A<br />

S/<br />

0/<br />

A/<br />

3/<br />

A<br />

S/<br />

0/<br />

A/<br />

2/<br />

A<br />

S/<br />

0/<br />

A/<br />

1/<br />

A<br />

S/<br />

0/<br />

A/<br />

0/<br />

A<br />

36 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

0,<br />

5<br />

trailing cable 32,5 m<br />

FSM<br />

FPM<br />

IK<br />

IK<br />

Example:<br />

type/bus/door/floor/FST<br />

S / 0 / A / 0 / A<br />

Legend<br />

:<br />

IK = Inspection Cabinet<br />

FK = car / COP<br />

Hose with colour code<br />

on the bus cable ends:<br />

0,<br />

5m<br />

= sw<br />

= schwarz=<br />

black<br />

1,<br />

0m<br />

= rt<br />

= rot<br />

= red<br />

3,<br />

0m<br />

= ws<br />

= weiss<br />

= white<br />

5,<br />

0m<br />

= ge<br />

= gelb<br />

= yellow<br />

7,<br />

0m<br />

= bl<br />

= blau<br />

= blue<br />

10,<br />

0m<br />

= gn<br />

= grün<br />

= green<br />

15,<br />

0m<br />

= sw<br />

= schwarz=<br />

black<br />

20,<br />

0m<br />

= rt<br />

= rot<br />

= red


4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

All common types of cable and hydraulic lifts can be operated using the<br />

FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>. The pre-assembled FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> can easily be<br />

adapted to any individual lift system on site using the FST menu. <strong>New</strong><br />

software versions can be installed at any time via the PC-Card slot without<br />

changing system-specific settings.<br />

Components and features of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>:<br />

Components:<br />

- FST-2 main circuit board with separate processors for call processing,<br />

drive control and bus management<br />

- Integrated repeater for electrical isolation of shaft bus and car bus<br />

- RS-585 / RS-422 / RS-232 controller interfaces for communication with<br />

drive regulators<br />

- Encoder interface for connecting common absolute value and<br />

incremental encoders<br />

- Flash memory and battery-buffered RAM for error memory with up to<br />

100 entries<br />

- PC-Card / PCMCIA slot for using memory cards<br />

- RS-232 modem interface for remote data transmission, FAX and PAM<br />

functions<br />

- RS-232 PC interface (laptop on site)<br />

- LC-Display with 4 × 20 characters (ASCII character set)<br />

- Keypad for intuitive navigation in main menu and test menu<br />

- 8 programmable inputs and outputs on the FST-2 main circuit board<br />

- 72 programmable inputs and outputs on additional RIO Modules<br />

An overview of the features and functions of FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> can be found<br />

in the description of the controller.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 37


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Technical data Description Value Unit<br />

Supply voltage 24 ±10% V DC<br />

Power consumption 300 mA<br />

Length × width × height<br />

Temperature range<br />

200 × 310 × 50 (7 7/<br />

8 × 12 3/16 × 2)<br />

mm (inch)<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +60 (32 - 140) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

38 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


310<br />

85<br />

120 85<br />

27,5<br />

X1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14.15 .16 .17 .18.19 .20.21 .22 .23.2 4<br />

X4 .2<br />

Fig. 4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

77<br />

X20.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 X21.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 X22.2 .3 .4 .5 .6<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 39<br />

200<br />

145<br />

10 85 90<br />

10<br />

68<br />

27,5<br />

X13.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12<br />

5<br />

10


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Jumpers<br />

Unused jumpers<br />

Not plugged:<br />

J1 (service jumper)<br />

Jumper J90 Shielding X9<br />

Fig. 4.3 FST-2 – Jumpers<br />

J131 J133 J135 J136<br />

ATTENTION: This jumper is delivered unplugged and must only be<br />

plugged after consulting NEW LIFT.<br />

Jumper J90 connects the shielding of the service PC cable X9 to the<br />

potential PE or GND.<br />

40 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

J90<br />

J100<br />

J110<br />

J120


Jumper J100 Shielding X10<br />

Jumper J110 Shielding X11<br />

Jumper J120 Shielding X12<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Function J90<br />

Shielding of connection cable to PE 1-2<br />

Shielding of connection cable to ground (GND) 2-3<br />

ATTENTION: This jumper is delivered unplugged and must only be<br />

plugged after consulting NEW LIFT.<br />

Jumper J100 connects the shielding of the modem cable X10 to the<br />

potential PE or GND.<br />

Function J100<br />

Shielding of connection cable to PE 1-2<br />

Shielding of connection cable to ground (GND) 2-3<br />

ATTENTION: This jumper is delivered unplugged and must only be<br />

plugged after consulting NEW LIFT.<br />

Jumper J110 connects the shielding of the DCP cable X11 to the potential<br />

PE or GND.<br />

Function J110<br />

Shielding of connection cable to PE 1-2<br />

Shielding of connection cable to ground (GND) 2-3<br />

Jumper J120 connects the shielding of the rotation encoder cable X10 to<br />

the potential PE or GND.<br />

Function J120<br />

Shielding of rotation encoder cable to PE 1-2<br />

Shielding of rotation encoder cable to ground (GND) 2-3<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 41


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Jumper J131 .. J136 Specification of shaft positioning type<br />

Jumpers J131, J133, J135 and J136 specify the type of shaft positioning<br />

used (rotation encoder (absolute value or incremental) or USP).<br />

Encoder signals over FST X12 (USP, LIK type 13, LIK type 10, INK type<br />

15):<br />

J131 J133 J135 J136<br />

2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3<br />

Encoder signals over trailing ribbon cable FSM X25 (LIK type 13a, LIK<br />

type 10a, INK type 15a):<br />

J131 J133 J135 J136<br />

1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2<br />

LEDs The LEDs listed in the following table are located next to the operating<br />

panel of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>.<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

RUN green on The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> is switched on<br />

and working correctly.<br />

off The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> has no power<br />

supply.<br />

STATUS green on The drive processor is working correctly.<br />

flashing Landing control is switched off.<br />

off Fault in the drive processor.<br />

ERROR red on Drive not possible.<br />

flashing One or more errors were added to the<br />

error list.<br />

off There is no error or event.<br />

LEDs The LEDs listed in the following table are located on the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

next to terminals X2 .. X4.<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

IN green flashing Incoming data packets on LON bus<br />

OUT green flashing Outgoing data packets on LON bus<br />

LD8 green on Power supply group bus<br />

42 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

LEDs The LEDs listed in the following table are located on the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

above terminals X14 .. X15.<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

SKZU green on Safety circuit closed<br />

SPB green on Door lock or door lock contact door<br />

side B closed<br />

SPA green on Door lock or door lock contact door<br />

side A closed<br />

TKA green on Car door contact door side A closed<br />

TKB green on Car door contact door side B closed<br />

TKC green on Car door contact door side C closed<br />

NHLT green on Emergency stop shaft closed<br />

FKNHLT green on Emergency stop car closed<br />

LEDs The LEDs listed in the following table are located on the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

above pre-selection relays K0 .. K12.<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

LD21 K0 green on Pre-selection relay K0 activated<br />

LD22 K1 green on Pre-selection relay K1 activated<br />

LD23 K2 green on Pre-selection relay K2 activated<br />

LD24 K3 green on Pre-selection relay K3 activated<br />

LD25 K4 green on Pre-selection relay K4 activated<br />

LD26 K5 green on Pre-selection relay K5 activated<br />

LD27 K6 green on Pre-selection relay K6 activated<br />

LD28 K7 green on Pre-selection relay K7 activated<br />

LD29 K8 green on Pre-selection relay K8 activated<br />

LD30 K9 green on Pre-selection relay K9 activated<br />

LD31 K10 green on Pre-selection relay K10 activated<br />

LD32 K11 green on Pre-selection relay K11 activated<br />

LD33 K12 green on Pre-selection relay K12 activated<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 43


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Safety Monitoring Device<br />

The Safety Monitoring Device is integrated in the FST-2 circuit board (K20<br />

.. K23) and enables car movements in the door zone with open car and<br />

shaft doors. This makes approaching and relevelling with open doors<br />

possible.<br />

The Safety Monitoring Device requires two solenoid switches on the<br />

car roof (zone A (S27) and zone B (S28)).<br />

The Safety Monitoring Device can only be activated and commissioned if<br />

these two solenoid switches including solenoids are installed and<br />

connected (see Installation & Commissioning manual).<br />

If the two functions “Relevelling with open doors” and “Approaching with<br />

open doors” are not required, the Safety Monitoring Device is not activated<br />

and the solenoid switches zone A & B are not required.<br />

The Safety Monitoring Device can be activated in the FST menu with the<br />

following parameters, if the zone switches A & B are installed and<br />

connected:<br />

MAIN MENU - Doors - Doors Basic - Pre-Opening = YES<br />

MAIN MENU - Drive - Relevelling = YES<br />

Operating principle The relays K20, K21, K22 and K23 are released in the initial state.<br />

Checking the Safety<br />

Monitoring Device<br />

If the car approaches the target floor, K21 (zone enabling) is activated by<br />

the controller.<br />

If the car reaches the door zone, the solenoid switches of zone A (S27) and<br />

zone B (S28) trigger and activate the two relays K22 and K23. The relays<br />

K22 and K23 issue the zone message to the controller (car is in door zone).<br />

After the control software received the zone message, bypass relay K20 is<br />

activated if required, this will make K21 release. This relay state (K20<br />

activated, K21 released, K22 activated, K23 activated) bridges the door<br />

contacts in the safety circuit and allows drive movement with the doors<br />

open.<br />

The Safety Monitoring Device is designed so that malfunction of the two<br />

solenoid switches is detected and results in a system shutdown.<br />

The two following error states must be checked after commissioning the<br />

Safety Monitoring Device:<br />

- Zone switch A (S27) is permanently open (disconnect FST X13.11)<br />

- Zone switch A (S27) is permanently closed (bridge FST X13.11 with<br />

FST X1.24)<br />

44 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Plug and terminal strip X1<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

In both cases, the controller must shut down with the following error<br />

message: DRM-MISSING ZONE (see Installation & Commissioning<br />

manual)<br />

LEDs The LEDs listed in the following table are located to the right of relays FST<br />

K20 .. K23.<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

LD17 K20 green on bypass door zone<br />

LD18 K21 red on Enable door zone<br />

LD19 K22 yellow on Encoder door zone A<br />

LD20 K23 yellow on Encoder door zone B<br />

FST-2:<br />

X1<br />

Power supply / messages<br />

Inputs/outputs<br />

1 +24V DC / 2A (supply voltage of FST-2)<br />

2 0V / GND / 2A (supply voltage of FST-2)<br />

3 +24V DC / 2A (supply voltage of FST-2)<br />

4 Programmable input/output 0 (port-0)<br />

5 Programmable input/output 1 (port-1)<br />

6 Programmable input/output 2 (port-2)<br />

7 Programmable input/output 3 (port-3)<br />

8 Programmable input/output 4 (port-4)<br />

9 Programmable input/output 5 (port-5)<br />

10 Programmable input/output 6 (port-6)<br />

11 Programmable input/output 7 (port-7)<br />

12 0V / GND<br />

13 Car Light OFF (KABL-AUS)<br />

14 Landing calls OFF (AST-AUS)<br />

15 0V / GND<br />

16 Temperature monitoring machine compartment (MR-TEMP)<br />

17 Overload (Überlast)<br />

18 Full load (Vollast)<br />

19 Brake monitoring brake A (UE-BREMSE_A)<br />

20 Brake monitoring brake B (UE-BREMSE_B)<br />

21 Drive monitoring (UE-ANTRIEB)<br />

22 Motor monitoring (UE-MOTOR)<br />

23 Standstill monitoring (UE-Schuetz)<br />

24 +4V DC / 2A<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 45


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Plug X2 (4-pin) The HHT handheld terminal is connected to plug X2.<br />

FST-2: X2 HHT Handheld terminal<br />

Pin 1 <strong>Bus</strong> signal A<br />

Pin 2 <strong>Bus</strong> signal B<br />

Pin 3 +24V<br />

Pin 4 0V / GND<br />

Plug X3 (4-pin) Plug X3 is a plug for the OPTION BUS and for special applications (e.g.<br />

RIO module).<br />

FST-2: X3 OPTION BUS<br />

Pin 1 <strong>Bus</strong> signal A<br />

Pin 2 <strong>Bus</strong> signal B<br />

Pin 3 +24V<br />

Pin 4 0V / GND<br />

Plug and terminal strip X4 The power supply for the shaft bus and the group controller is connected<br />

to terminal strip X4.<br />

FST-2: X4 Power supply shaft bus / groups<br />

Pin 1 +24V<br />

Pin 2 0V / GND<br />

Plug X5 (4-pin) The shaft bus side A is connected to plug X5.<br />

FST-2: X5 Shaft bus A<br />

Pin 1 <strong>Bus</strong> signal A<br />

Pin 2 <strong>Bus</strong> signal B<br />

Pin 3 +24V<br />

Pin 4 0V / GND<br />

Plug X6 (4-pin) The shaft bus side B is connected to plug X6.<br />

FST-2: X6 Shaft bus B<br />

Pin 1 <strong>Bus</strong> signal A<br />

Pin 2 <strong>Bus</strong> signal B<br />

Pin 3 +24V<br />

Pin 4 0V / GND<br />

46 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Plug X9 SUB-D (9-pin)<br />

Plug X10 SUB-D (9-pin)<br />

Plug X11 SUB-D (9-pin)<br />

FST-2:<br />

Service PC (RS-232 interface)<br />

X9<br />

1 DCD Data Carrier Detected<br />

2 RxD Receive Data<br />

3 TxD Transmit Data<br />

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready<br />

5 0V / GND Ground<br />

6 DSR Data Set Ready<br />

7 RTS Request To Send<br />

8 CTS Clear To Send<br />

9 RI Ring Indicator<br />

FST-2:<br />

Protocol adapter / modem<br />

X10<br />

1 DCD Data Carrier Detected<br />

2 RxD Receive Data<br />

3 TxD Transmit Data<br />

4 DTR Data Terminal Ready<br />

5 0V / GND Ground<br />

6 DSR Data Set Ready<br />

7 RTS Request To Send<br />

8 CTS Clear To Send<br />

9 RI Ring Indicator<br />

FST-2:<br />

X11<br />

1 Not assigned<br />

2 Not assigned<br />

3 TxD<br />

4 +Tx<br />

5 0V / GND<br />

6 Not assigned<br />

7 +Rx<br />

8 -Rx<br />

9 -Tx<br />

DCP for<br />

controller activation<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 47


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Plug X12 SUB-D (9-pin)<br />

Plug and terminal strip X13<br />

Plug and terminal strip X14<br />

FST-2:<br />

Shaft positioning<br />

X12<br />

1 GND<br />

2 INC-A / ABS-CLK<br />

3 GND<br />

4 INC B / ABS-DATA<br />

5 GND<br />

6 +24V<br />

7 INC-A (inv.) / ABS-CLK<br />

8 INC B (inv.) / ABS-DATA<br />

9 VCC<br />

FST-2:<br />

X13<br />

Safety Monitoring Device (SHS) /<br />

KO KU with incremental positioning<br />

1 J131 Pin 3 (USP+T or KO from FSM)<br />

2 Correction switch top “KO” (input FST)<br />

3 J133 Pin 3 (USP-T or KU from FSM)<br />

4 Correction switch bottom “KU” (input FST)<br />

5 J135 Pin 3 (USP-R from FSM)<br />

6 J136 Pin 3 (USP+R from FSM)<br />

7 SHS zone enable (with external SHS)<br />

8 SHS zone bypass (with external SHS)<br />

9 SHS zone signal (with external SHS)<br />

10 SHS encoder zone switch A (from FSM)<br />

11 SHS encoder zone switch A (input FSM)<br />

12 SHS encoder zone switch B<br />

FST-2:<br />

Safety circuit query 1<br />

X14<br />

1 Safety circuit closed (SHK_SKZU)<br />

2 Door lock or door lock contact door side B closed (SHK_SPB)<br />

3 Door lock or door lock contact door side A closed (SHK_SPA)<br />

4 Car door contact door side A closed (SHK_TKA)<br />

5 Car door contact door side B closed (SHK_TKB)<br />

6 Car door contact door side C closed (SHK_TKC)<br />

7 Emergency stop shaft closed (SHK_NHLT)<br />

8 Emergency stop car closed (SHK_FKNH)<br />

48 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Plug and terminal strip X15<br />

Plug and terminal strip X16<br />

Plug and terminal strip X17<br />

Plug and terminal strip X18<br />

FST-2:<br />

Safety circuit query 2<br />

X15<br />

1 bypass UP (VST_UAUF)<br />

2 bypass DOWN (VST_UAB)<br />

3 Phase safety circuit (VST_L)<br />

4 Phase safety circuit (VST_L)<br />

5 bypass auxiliary (VST_RUMG)<br />

6 N safety circuit (VST _N)<br />

7 Output door bypass<br />

FST-2:<br />

Intercom system<br />

X16<br />

1 Intercom wire A (SPR-A)<br />

2 Intercom wire B (SPR-B)<br />

3 Intercom wire C (SPR-C)<br />

4 Intercom wire D (SPR-D)<br />

FST-2:<br />

Alarm system<br />

X17<br />

1 Alarm<br />

2 Emergency power supply +HSG<br />

3 0V / GND<br />

4 Levelling switch + (AWE+BU)<br />

5 Levelling switch - (AWE-BU)<br />

6 Alarm wire A (UPN-A)<br />

7 Alarm wire B (UPN-B)<br />

FST-2:<br />

Auxiliary control 24V<br />

X18<br />

1 +24V<br />

2 Auxiliary control ON<br />

3 Auxiliary control UP<br />

4 Auxiliary control DOWN<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 49


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Plug and terminal strip X19<br />

Plug and terminal strip X20<br />

Plug and terminal strip X21<br />

Plug and terminal strip X22<br />

FST-2:<br />

Auxiliary control 230V AC<br />

X19<br />

1 Auxiliary control UP or DOWN (VST_RUMG)<br />

2 bypass auxiliary control (VST_L)<br />

3 Phase auxiliary control (VST_UMG)<br />

4 Auxiliary control ON (VST_UEIN)<br />

FST-2:<br />

Pre-selection<br />

X20<br />

1 Safety circuit CLOSED (VST_SHKZU)<br />

2 N safety circuit (VST_N)<br />

3 Pre-selection contact K0 .. K1 COM (VST_K0-1COM)<br />

4 Pre selection contact K0 (VST_K0NO)<br />

5 Pre selection contact K1 (VST_K1NO)<br />

6 Pre-selection contact K2 .. K3 COM (VST_K2-3COM)<br />

7 Pre selection contact K2 (VST_K2NO)<br />

8 Pre selection contact K3 (VST_K3NO)<br />

9 Pre-selection contact K4 .. K6 COM (VST_K4-6COM)<br />

10 Pre selection contact K4 (VST_K4NO)<br />

11 Pre selection contact K5 (VST_K5NO)<br />

12 Pre selection contact K6 (VST_K6NO)<br />

FST-2:<br />

Pre-selection<br />

X21<br />

1 Pre-selection contact K7 .. K8 COM (VST_K7-8COM)<br />

2 Pre selection contact K7 (VST_K7NO)<br />

3 Pre selection contact K7 (VST_K7NC)<br />

4 Pre selection contact K8 (VST_K8NO)<br />

5 Pre selection contact K8 (VST_K8NC)<br />

FST-2:<br />

Pre-selection<br />

X22<br />

1 Pre-selection contact K9 COM (VST_K9COM)<br />

2 Pre selection contact K9 (VST_K9NO)<br />

3 Pre-selection contact K10 COM (VST_K10COM)<br />

4 Pre selection contact K10 (VST_K10NO)<br />

5 Pre-selection contact K11 .. K12 COM (VST_K11-12COM)<br />

6 Pre-selection contact K11 NO (VST_K11NO)<br />

8 Pre-selection contact K11 NC (VST_K11NC)<br />

9 Pre-selection contact K12 NO (VST_K12NO)<br />

50 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Plug and terminal strip X30<br />

FST-2:<br />

X22<br />

Pre-selection<br />

10 Pre-selection contact K12 NC (VST_K12NC)<br />

11 Alarm relay contact K13 COM1 (NR_COM1)<br />

12 Alarm relay contact K13 NO1 (NR_NO1)<br />

13 Alarm relay contact K13 NC1 (NR_NC1)<br />

14 Alarm relay contact K13 COM2 (NR_COM2)<br />

15 Alarm relay contact K13 NC2 (NR_NC2)<br />

FST-2:<br />

X30<br />

Terminal<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Trailing cable FSM: X30<br />

Terminal<br />

1 +24V 1<br />

2 CBUS-A 2<br />

3 USP+T 3<br />

4 UPSP-R 4<br />

5 SPR-A 5<br />

6 SPR-C 6<br />

7 ENCODER A 7<br />

8 UPN-A 8<br />

9 AWE+BU 9<br />

10 +HSG 10<br />

11 0V / GND 11<br />

12 0V / GND 12<br />

13 ALARM 13<br />

14 CBUS-A 14<br />

15 USP-T 15<br />

16 USP+R 16<br />

17 SPR-B 17<br />

18 SPR-D 18<br />

19 ENCODER B 19<br />

20 UPN-B 20<br />

21 AWE-BU 21<br />

22 + 24V 22<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 51


4 Technical data<br />

4.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

Plug and terminal strip X32 FST-2:<br />

X32<br />

Terminal<br />

Trailing cable FSM: X32<br />

Terminal<br />

1 Car door side A (VST_TA) 1<br />

2 Car door side B (VST_TB) 2<br />

3 Car door side C (VST_TC) 3<br />

4 Emergency stop car (VST_FKNH) 4<br />

5 bypass UP (VST_UAUF) 5<br />

6 bypass DOWN (VST_UAB) 6<br />

7 bypass ON (VST_UEIN) 7<br />

8 bypass (VST_UMG) 8<br />

9 N safety circuit (VST_N) 9<br />

52 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4.3 FSM car control module<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

The FSM car control module provides the interface between FST-2-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong> and all car signals. Signal exchange between FSM and FST-2<br />

takes place via the LON bus. The FSM is installed either in the service box<br />

on the car roof or in the car panel.<br />

After switching off the main switch, parts of the car control module<br />

are still live.<br />

- Plug X19 (car light) is only off circuit after the car light supply has<br />

been switched off!<br />

- Plug X13 (emergency light) is only off circuit after the trailing cable<br />

plug X30 has been unplugged!<br />

Technical data Description Value Unit<br />

Supply voltage 24 ±10% V DC<br />

Power consumption 300 mA<br />

Outputs Excess load and short-circuit proof<br />

Inputs/outputs Low-active<br />

Length × width × height<br />

Temperature range<br />

250 × 140 × 34 (9 7/<br />

8 × 5 1/2 × 1 3/8)<br />

mm (inch)<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +60 (32 - 140) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 53


4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

250<br />

117,5<br />

117,5<br />

Fig. 4.4 FSM car control module<br />

Trailing Cable<br />

le<br />

b<br />

C<br />

a<br />

ilin<br />

g<br />

T<br />

ra<br />

K<br />

/<br />

I<br />

N<br />

L<br />

I<br />

K<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

FSM 5 20 2.2<br />

54 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

140<br />

125<br />

104<br />

le<br />

b<br />

C<br />

a<br />

ilin<br />

g<br />

T<br />

ra<br />

1<br />

2<br />

3<br />

n<br />

it<br />

te<br />

U<br />

m<br />

o<br />

R<br />

e<br />

n<br />

it<br />

te<br />

U<br />

m<br />

o<br />

R<br />

e<br />

5


Jumper JT Car door allocation<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

A separate car control module is required for door C when three car doors<br />

are installed.<br />

Jumper J21 Limit switch “car door A closed”<br />

Jumper J31 Limit switch “car door A open”<br />

Jumper J71 Limit switch “car door B closed”<br />

Jumper J81 Limit switch “car door B open”<br />

Jumper J112 Car light monitoring<br />

Setting JT<br />

Door A and/or door B open<br />

Door C plugged<br />

Setting J21<br />

Limit switch in series with solenoid K2 1-2<br />

No limit switch (solenoid K2 on +24V) 2-3<br />

Setting J31<br />

Limit switch in series with solenoid K3 1-2<br />

No limit switch (solenoid K3 on +24V) 2-3<br />

Setting J71<br />

Limit switch in series with solenoid K7 1-2<br />

No limit switch (solenoid K7 on +24V) 2-3<br />

Setting J81<br />

Limit switch in series with solenoid K8 1-2<br />

No limit switch (solenoid K8 on +24V) 2-3<br />

Setting J112<br />

Internal voltage monitoring 1-2<br />

External encoder 2-3<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 55


4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

Jumpers JK1, JK2 and JK3 Assigning the car in group mode<br />

If multiple FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>s are combined with a GST Group <strong>Controller</strong>,<br />

cars are assigned to an FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> with jumpers JK1, JK2 and JK3.<br />

Car assignments of the FSM car control module and the FPM car panel<br />

module must be identical for each car.<br />

Unused jumper<br />

Not plugged:<br />

J1 (service jumper)<br />

Jumper J25 Shielding encoder cable X25<br />

LEDs<br />

Setting JK1 JK2 JK3<br />

FST-2 A open open open<br />

FST-2 B plugged open open<br />

FST-2 C open plugged open<br />

FST-2 D plugged plugged open<br />

FST-2 E open open plugged<br />

FST-2 F plugged open plugged<br />

FST-2 G open plugged plugged<br />

FST-2 H plugged plugged plugged<br />

Jumper J25 connects the shielding of the rotation encoder cable X25 to the<br />

potential PE or GND.<br />

.<br />

Function J25<br />

Shielding of rotation encoder cable to ground (GND) 1-2<br />

Shielding of rotation encoder cable to PE 2-3<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

LD1 green on Forced closing of door A (relay K1)<br />

LD2 green on Alarm (relay K9)<br />

LD3 green on Close door A (relay K2)<br />

LD4 green on Car light ON (relay K10)<br />

LD5 green on Open door A (relay K3)<br />

LD6 green on Car ventilator ON (relay K11)<br />

LD8 green on Cam B (relay K4)<br />

LD9 green on Power supply +5V<br />

56 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Plug and terminal strip X1<br />

Plug and terminal strip X2<br />

Plug and terminal strip X3<br />

Plug and terminal strip X4<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

State Description<br />

LD10 green on Cam A (relay K5)<br />

LD11 green on Forced closing of door B (relay K6)<br />

LD12 green on Close door B (relay K7)<br />

LD13 green on Open door B (relay K8)<br />

FSM: X1 Safety circuit without bypass 230V<br />

1 Switch 1<br />

2 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

3 Switch 1<br />

4 Switch 2<br />

5 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

6 Switch 2<br />

7 Switch 3<br />

8 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

9 Switch 3<br />

FSM: X2 Safety circuit with bypass 230V<br />

1 Safety gear switch<br />

2 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

3 Safety gear switch<br />

4 Switch 4<br />

5 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

6 Switch 4<br />

FSM: X3 Safety circuit car door contacts 230V<br />

1 Door contact car door A<br />

2 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

3 Door contact car door A<br />

4 Door contact car door B<br />

5 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

6 Door contact car door B<br />

FSM: X4 Outputs Gong<br />

1 +24V<br />

2 Gong UP<br />

3 Gong DOWN<br />

4 GND<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 57


4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

Plug and terminal strip X5<br />

Plug and terminal strip X6<br />

Plug and terminal strip X7<br />

Plug and terminal strip X8<br />

FSM: X5 Inputs Car Load Sensor<br />

1 +24V<br />

2 Minimum Load Input (empty car)<br />

3 Full Load Input<br />

4 Overload Input<br />

5 GND<br />

FSM: X6 Inputs car door A<br />

1 +24V<br />

2 Limit switch door open<br />

3 +24V<br />

4 Limit switch door closed<br />

5 +24V<br />

6 Reversing contact door A<br />

7 +24V<br />

8 Photocell contact door A<br />

9 GND<br />

FSM: X7 Outputs car door A<br />

1 K2, K3 common door signals<br />

2 K3 door signal „open door A“<br />

3 K2 door signal „close door A“<br />

4 K1 relay output for nudging / safety curtain test (NO)<br />

5 K1 relay output for nudging / safety curtain test (NC)<br />

6 K1 relay output for nudging / safety curtain test (COM)<br />

FSM: X8 Retiring Cams<br />

1 Relay K5, cam door side A (NC)<br />

2 Relay K5, cam door side A (COM)<br />

3 Relay K5, cam door side A (NO)<br />

4 Relay K4, cam door side B (NC)<br />

5 Relay K4, cam door side B (COM)<br />

6 Relay K4, cam door side B (NO)<br />

58 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Plug and terminal strip X9<br />

Plug and terminal strip X10<br />

Plug and terminal strip X11<br />

Plug X12 (4-pin)<br />

Plug and terminal strip X13<br />

FSM: X9 Outputs car door B<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

1 K7, K8 common door signals<br />

2 K8 door signal „open door B“<br />

3 K7 door signal „close door B“<br />

4 K6 relay output for nudging / safety curtain test (NO)<br />

5 K6 relay output for nudging / safety curtain test (NC)<br />

6 K6 relay output for nudging / safety curtain test (COM)<br />

FSM: X10 Inputs car door B<br />

1 +24V<br />

2 Limit switch door open<br />

3 +24V<br />

4 Limit switch door closed<br />

5 +24V<br />

6 Reversing contact door B<br />

7 +24V<br />

8 Photocell contact door B<br />

9 GND<br />

FSM: X11 Car light sensor<br />

1 +24V<br />

2 Input external light sensor<br />

3 +HSG<br />

4 +8V (max. 50mA)<br />

5 GND<br />

FSM: X12 LON bus car<br />

Pin 1 <strong>Bus</strong> signal A<br />

Pin 2 <strong>Bus</strong> signal B<br />

Pin 3 +24V<br />

Pin 4 GND<br />

FSM: X13 Alarm button /emergency light<br />

1 Emergency light +<br />

2 Emergency light -<br />

3 Alarm button car top (NC)<br />

4 Alarm button car top (COM)<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 59


4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

Plug and terminal strip X14<br />

Plug and terminal strip X15 ATTENTION: Only use the terminals of X15 if plug X25 is not used!<br />

Plug and terminal strip X16<br />

Plug and terminal strip X17<br />

Plug and terminal strip X18<br />

FSM: X14 Door Zone switches<br />

1 +24V or +HSG<br />

2 Door Zone switch A (Geber A)<br />

3 GND<br />

4 +24V<br />

5 Door Zone switch B (Geber B)<br />

6 GND<br />

,<br />

FSM: X15 Spare wires LIK / USP<br />

1 USP+R (FST-2 X13.6)<br />

2 USP-R (FST-2 X13.5)<br />

3 USP+T / KO (FST-2 X13.1)<br />

4 USP-T / KU (FST-2 X13.3)<br />

FSM: X16 Spare wires intercom system<br />

1 Intercom D (FST-2 X16.4)<br />

2 Intercom C (FST-2 X16.3)<br />

3 Intercom B (FST-2 X16.2)<br />

4 Intercom A (FST-2 X16.1)<br />

FSM: X17 Spare wires LMS 24/7<br />

1 Levelling switch - (FST-2 X17.5)<br />

2 Levelling switch + (FST-2 X17.4)<br />

3 Emergency Tel. B (FST-2 X17.7)<br />

4 Emergency Tel. A (FST-2 X17.6)<br />

FSM: X18 Three-phase door 400V AC<br />

1 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

2 Phase L3<br />

3 Phase L2<br />

4 Phase L1<br />

5 Neutral conductor N (N)<br />

60 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Plug and terminal strip X19<br />

Plug and terminal strip X20<br />

Plug and terminal strip X21<br />

Plug and terminal strip X22<br />

FSM: X19 Car light / ventilator<br />

1 K10 car light (K10)<br />

2 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

3 N4 neutral conductor car light (N4)<br />

4 K11 car ventilator (K11)<br />

5 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

6 N4 neutral conductor car light (N4)<br />

7 L4A spare (LA4)<br />

8 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

9 N4 neutral conductor car light (N4)<br />

FSM: X20 Alarm<br />

1 Alarm button under car (COM)<br />

2 Alarm button under car (NC)<br />

3 K9 Emergency Call Relay (COM)<br />

4 K9 Emergency Call Relay (NC)<br />

5 K9 Emergency Call Relay (NO)<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

FSM: X21 Inspection remote control unit<br />

1 Inspection remote control UP<br />

2 Inspection remote control DOWN<br />

3 Inspection remote control ON<br />

4 Bypass auxiliary control<br />

5 with bypass safety circuit switches 1-3<br />

6 without bypass safety circuit switches 1-3<br />

7 Socket remote control unit (neutral conductor) (N4)<br />

8 Protective conductor (PE)<br />

9 Socket remote control unit (phase) (LA4)<br />

FSM: X22 Inspection remote control 24V<br />

1 +24V<br />

2 Inspection ON<br />

3 Inspection UP<br />

4 Inspection DOWN<br />

5 Inspection drive FAST<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 61


4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

Plug X23 (4-pin)<br />

Plug and terminal strip X24<br />

Plug X25 (9-pin)<br />

Plug and terminal strip X26<br />

FSTM: X23 HHT Handheld terminal<br />

Pin 1 <strong>Bus</strong> signal A<br />

Pin 2 <strong>Bus</strong> signal B<br />

Pin 3 +24V<br />

Pin 4 GND<br />

FSM: X24 Spare inputs and outputs<br />

1 GND<br />

2 Programmable input/output 01* (port 72)<br />

3 Programmable input/output 02* (port 73)<br />

4 Programmable input/output 03 (port 74)<br />

5 Programmable input/output 04 (port 75)<br />

6 Programmable input/output 05 (port 76)<br />

7 Programmable input/output 06 (port 77)<br />

8 Programmable input/output 07 (port 78)<br />

9 +24V<br />

* = n/a with serial doors<br />

FSM: X25 Shaft positioning<br />

1 GND<br />

2 INC A / ABS-DATA<br />

3 GND<br />

4 INC B / ABS-DATA<br />

5 GND<br />

6 +24V<br />

7 INC-A (inv.) / ABS-CLK<br />

8 INC B (inv.) / ABS-DATA<br />

9<br />

FSM: X26 Service box<br />

1 Alarm button<br />

2 Alarm button<br />

3 Shaft light button<br />

4 Shaft light button<br />

62 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Plug and terminal strip X27<br />

Plug X30 (22-pin)<br />

FSM: X27 Inspection limit switch<br />

1 Inspection limit switch UP<br />

2 Inspection limit switch UP<br />

3 Inspection limit switch DOWN<br />

4 Inspection limit switch DOWN<br />

5 Folding guardrail contact<br />

6 Folding guardrail contact<br />

7 N_SHK (safety circuit)<br />

FSM: X30<br />

Terminal<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

Trailing cable FST-2: X30<br />

Terminal<br />

1 +24V 1<br />

2 CBUS-A 2<br />

3 USP+T 3<br />

4 UPSP-R 4<br />

5 SPR-A 5<br />

6 SPR-C 6<br />

7 ENCODER A 7<br />

8 UPN-A 8<br />

9 AWE+BU 9<br />

10 +HSG 10<br />

11 0V / GND 11<br />

12 0V / GND 12<br />

13 ALARM 13<br />

14 CBUS-A 14<br />

15 USP-T 15<br />

16 USP+R 16<br />

17 SPR-B 17<br />

18 SPR-D 18<br />

19 ENCODER B 19<br />

20 UPN-B 20<br />

21 AWE-BU 21<br />

22 +24V 22<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 63


4 Technical data<br />

4.3 FSM car control module<br />

Plug and terminal strip X31<br />

Plug and terminal strip X32<br />

FSM: X31<br />

Terminal<br />

Trailing cable 400V AC FSM<br />

Terminal<br />

strip<br />

1 Neutral conductor (N) X18.5<br />

2 Phase L1 (L1) X18.4<br />

3 Phase L2 (L2) X18.3<br />

4 Phase L3 (L3) X18.2<br />

5 Neutral conductor car light (N4) X19.3<br />

6 Spare (LA4) X19.7<br />

7 Shaft light button X26.3<br />

8 Shaft light button X26.4<br />

9 Protective conductor (PE) X19.5<br />

FSM: X32<br />

Terminal<br />

Trailing cable FSM<br />

Terminal<br />

strip<br />

1 Car door side A (VST_TA) X3.1<br />

2 Car door side B (VST_TB) X3.4<br />

3 Car door side C (VST_TC) X3.6<br />

4 Emergency stop car (VST_FKNH) X2.1<br />

5 bypass UP (VST_UAUF) X27.1<br />

6 bypass DOWN (VST_UAB) X27.3<br />

7 bypass ON (VST_UEIN) X27.5<br />

8 bypass (VST_UMG) X214.<br />

9 N safety circuit (VST_N) X27.7<br />

64 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4.4 FPM car panel module<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.4 FPM car panel module<br />

The FPM car panel module provides the interface between car panel and<br />

FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>. One FPM supports up to 16 car call buttons. The FPM is<br />

connected to the FST-2 with the LON bus. The FPM is installed either in<br />

the service box on the car roof or in the car panel.<br />

Technical data Description Value Unit<br />

Supply voltage 24 ±10% V DC<br />

Power consumption 50 mA<br />

Max. switch-on current per output for<br />

approx. 40 ms<br />

600 mA<br />

Outputs Excess load and short-circuit proof<br />

Inputs/outputs Low-active<br />

Length × width × height<br />

Temperature range<br />

120 × 71 × 20 (4 3/4<br />

× 2 3/4 × 3/4)<br />

mm (inch)<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +60 (32 - 140) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 65


4 Technical data<br />

4.4 FPM car panel module<br />

Fig. 4.5 FPM car panel module<br />

Jumpers Setting car doors<br />

FPM002.cdr<br />

In “Single door mode”, the car calls of the car panel module are assigned<br />

using the jumpers on one door side (A, B or C). If jumper J2 is plugged, the<br />

FPM is in “Dual door mode”, this means that the FPM can process car calls<br />

of door sides A and B.<br />

A separate FPM is required for door C if three car doors are installed.<br />

66 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Assigning the car in simplex mode<br />

Assigning the car in group mode<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.4 FPM car panel module<br />

Setting Mode JT1 JT2 J2<br />

Door A Single door<br />

mode<br />

open open open<br />

Door B Single door<br />

mode<br />

plugged open open<br />

Door C Single door<br />

mode<br />

open plugged open<br />

Doors A+B Dual door mode open open plugged<br />

Doors A+B<br />

(Fireman input X4.4 and<br />

loading button X4.34 act<br />

on door B.)<br />

Dual door mode open plugged plugged<br />

Doors B+A<br />

(Calls A and B<br />

switched.)<br />

If multiple FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>s are combined with a GST Group <strong>Controller</strong>,<br />

cars are assigned to an FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> with jumpers JK1, JK2 and JK4.<br />

Car assignments of the FSM car control module and the FPM car panel<br />

module must be identical for each car.<br />

Unused jumpers<br />

Not plugged:<br />

- J1 (service jumper)<br />

Dual door mode plugged open plugged<br />

Setting JK4 JK2 JK1<br />

FST-2 A open open open<br />

Setting JK4 JK2 JK1<br />

FST-2 A open open open<br />

FST-2 B open open plugged<br />

FST-2 C open plugged open<br />

FST-2 D open plugged plugged<br />

FST-2 E plugged open open<br />

FST-2 F plugged open plugged<br />

FST-2 G plugged plugged open<br />

FST-2 H plugged plugged plugged<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 67


4 Technical data<br />

4.4 FPM car panel module<br />

LEDs<br />

Terminals and plugs<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

LD1 yellow flashing<br />

briefly<br />

FPM ready<br />

flashing or<br />

permanent<br />

ly on<br />

Hardware error<br />

LD2 green on Supply voltage (+5V) present<br />

FPM: X1 Colour<br />

code<br />

See LON-<strong>Bus</strong> page 91.<br />

FPM: X2 Colour<br />

code<br />

See LON-<strong>Bus</strong> page 91.<br />

LON bus<br />

LON bus<br />

FPM: X3 car call extension<br />

1 +24V (supply voltage)<br />

2 +24V (supply voltage)<br />

3 +5V (supply voltage)<br />

4 +5V (supply voltage)<br />

5 Reset SPI drivers<br />

6 0V / GND<br />

7 Serial clock<br />

8 0V / GND<br />

9 Serial output<br />

10 0V / GND<br />

11 Serial input<br />

12 0V / GND<br />

13 SPI select 3 (IDR 48 .. 63)<br />

14 0V / GND<br />

15 SPI select 2 (IDR 32 .. 47)<br />

16 0V / GND<br />

17 SPI select 1 (IDR 16 .. 31)<br />

18 0V / GND<br />

19 FPE detection<br />

20 0V / GND<br />

The following colour code table is based on the 50-pin standard cable for<br />

wiring the car control panel. Individual systems can use different colour<br />

68 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


codes.<br />

FPM:<br />

X4<br />

Colour<br />

code<br />

Car panel signals in “Single door<br />

mode”<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.4 FPM car panel module<br />

Input/<br />

output<br />

1 WH Button “Ventilator ON” E<br />

2 BR Button “Close door B” E<br />

3 GN Button “Close door A” E<br />

4 YE Key switch for fireman mode E<br />

5 GY Display 2 A<br />

6 PK Overload indicator A<br />

7 BU Direction display UP A<br />

8 RD +24V A<br />

9 BL Floor display 6 A<br />

10 VT Floor display 3 A<br />

11 GY PK Floor display 0 (LSB) A<br />

12 RD BU car call 15 I/O<br />

13 WH GN car call 12 I/O<br />

14 BR GN car call 09 I/O<br />

15 WH YE car call 06 I/O<br />

16 YE BR car call 03 I/O<br />

17 WH GY car call 00 I/O<br />

18 GY BR 0V / GND A<br />

19 WH PK 0V / GND A<br />

20 PK BR 0V / GND A<br />

21 WH BU 0V / GND A<br />

22 BR BU +24V A<br />

23 WH RD +24V A<br />

24 BR RD +24V A<br />

25 WH BL Floor display 7 (MSB) A<br />

26 BR BL Floor display 4 A<br />

27 GY GN Floor display 1 A<br />

28 YE GY Enable car calls A<br />

29 RD GN car call 13 I/O<br />

30 YE PK car call 10 I/O<br />

31 GN BU car call 07 I/O<br />

32 YE BU car call 04 I/O<br />

33 GN RD car call 01 I/O<br />

34 YE RD Landing control OFF or button “loading<br />

function” (see “Pin-34 Functn” on<br />

page 123)<br />

E<br />

35 GN BL Button “Open door B” or “divider door”<br />

(see “Divider-Door” on page 117)<br />

E<br />

36 YE BL Button “Open door A” E<br />

37 GY BU Key switch for priority car E<br />

38 RD BU Display 1 A<br />

39 GY RD Display 0 A<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 69


4 Technical data<br />

4.4 FPM car panel module<br />

FPM: Colour Car panel signals in “Single door Input/<br />

X4 code<br />

mode”<br />

output<br />

40 PK RD Direction display DOWN A<br />

41 GY BL 0V / GND A<br />

42 PK BL Floor display 5 A<br />

43 BU BL Floor display 2 A<br />

44 RD BL Secondary car call enabling (only active<br />

with a card reader in the car)<br />

A<br />

45 WH BR<br />

BL<br />

car call 14 I/O<br />

46 YE GN<br />

BL<br />

car call 11 I/O<br />

47 PK GR<br />

BL<br />

car call 08 I/O<br />

48 BL BU<br />

RD<br />

car call 05 I/O<br />

49 WH GN<br />

BL<br />

car call 02 I/O<br />

50 GN BR<br />

BL<br />

+24V A<br />

FPM:<br />

X4<br />

Colour<br />

code<br />

Car panel signals in “Dual door<br />

mode”<br />

Input/<br />

output<br />

1 WH Button “Ventilator ON” E<br />

2 BR Button “Close door B” E<br />

3 GN Button “Close door A” E<br />

4 YE Key switch for fireman mode E<br />

5 GY Display 2 A<br />

6 PK Overload indicator A<br />

7 BU Direction display UP A<br />

8 RD +24V A<br />

9 BL Floor display 6 A<br />

10 VT Floor display 3 A<br />

11 GY PK Floor display 0 (LSB) A<br />

12 RD BU car call 07, door side B I/O<br />

13 WH GN car call 04, door side B I/O<br />

14 BR GN car call 01, door side B I/O<br />

15 WH YE car call 06, door side A I/O<br />

16 YE BR car call 03, door side A I/O<br />

17 WH GY car call 00, door side A I/O<br />

18 GY BR 0V / GND A<br />

19 WH PK 0V / GND A<br />

20 PK BR 0V / GND A<br />

21 WH BU 0V / GND A<br />

22 BR BU +24V A<br />

23 WH RD +24V A<br />

24 BR RD +24V A<br />

70 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4 Technical data<br />

4.4 FPM car panel module<br />

FPM: Colour Car panel signals in “Dual door Input/<br />

X4 code<br />

mode”<br />

output<br />

25 WH BL Floor display 7 (MSB) A<br />

26 BR BL Floor display 4 A<br />

27 GY GN Floor display 1 A<br />

28 YE GY Enable car calls A<br />

29 RD GN car call 05, door side B I/O<br />

30 YE PK car call 02, door side B I/O<br />

31 GN BU car call 07, door side A I/O<br />

32 YE BU car call 04, door side A I/O<br />

33 GN RD car call 01, door side A I/O<br />

34 YE RD Landing control OFF or button “loading<br />

function” (see “Pin-34 Functn” on<br />

page 123)<br />

E<br />

35 GN BL Button “Open door B” or “divider door”<br />

(see “Divider-Door” on page 117)<br />

E<br />

36 YE BL Button “Open door A” E<br />

37 GY BU Key switch for priority car E<br />

38 RD BU Display 1 A<br />

39 GY RD Display 0 A<br />

40 PK RD Direction display DOWN A<br />

41 GY BL 0V / GND A<br />

42 PK BL Floor display 5 A<br />

43 BU BL Floor display 2 A<br />

44 RD BL Secondary car call enabling (only active<br />

with a card reader in the car)<br />

A<br />

45 WH BR<br />

BL<br />

car call 06, door side B I/O<br />

46 YE GN<br />

BL<br />

car call 03, door side B I/O<br />

47 PK GR<br />

BL<br />

car call 00, door side B I/O<br />

48 BL BU<br />

RD<br />

car call 05, door side A I/O<br />

49 WH GN<br />

BL<br />

car call 02, door side A I/O<br />

50 GN BR<br />

BL<br />

+24V A<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 71


4 Technical data<br />

4.5 FPE car panel extension module<br />

4.5 FPE car panel extension module<br />

The FPE car panel extension module extends the 16 car calls of the FPM<br />

car panel module by:<br />

- 16 car calls (FPE16)<br />

- 32 car calls (FPE32)<br />

- 48 car calls (FPE48)<br />

The FPE is connected to the FPM car panel module with plug X3.<br />

Switching from “Single door mode” to “Dual door mode” is done with jumper<br />

J2 of the assigned FPM (see “Jumpers” on page 66).<br />

Technical data Description Value Unit<br />

Supply voltage 24 ±10% V DC<br />

Power consumption 10 mA<br />

Max. switch-on current per output for<br />

approx. 40 ms<br />

600 mA<br />

Outputs Excess load and short-circuit proof<br />

Inputs/outputs Low-active<br />

Length × width × height<br />

Temperature range<br />

98.5 × 71 × 20 (3 7/<br />

8 × 2 3/4 × 3/4)<br />

mm (inch)<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +60 (32 - 140) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

72 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


X3<br />

Fig. 4.6 FPE car panel extension module<br />

Terminals and plugs<br />

98.5<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.5 FPE car panel extension module<br />

The following colour code table is based on the 50-pin standard cable for<br />

wiring the car control panel. Individual systems can use different colour<br />

codes.<br />

FPE:<br />

X2<br />

Colour<br />

code<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 73<br />

X2<br />

FPE001.cdr<br />

Car panel signals in “Single door<br />

mode”<br />

Input/<br />

output<br />

1 WH Output: +24V A<br />

2 BR car call 61 I/O<br />

3 GN car call 58 I/O<br />

4 YE car call 55 I/O<br />

5 GY car call 52 I/O<br />

6 PK car call 49 I/O<br />

7 BU car call 46 I/O<br />

8 RD car call 43 I/O<br />

9 BL car call 40 I/O<br />

10 VT car call 37 I/O<br />

11 GY PK car call 34 I/O<br />

12 RD BU car call 31 I/O<br />

13 WH GN car call 28 I/O<br />

14 BR GN car call 25 I/O


4 Technical data<br />

4.5 FPE car panel extension module<br />

FPE: Colour Car panel signals in “Single door Input/<br />

X2 code<br />

mode”<br />

output<br />

15 WH YE car call 22 I/O<br />

16 YE BR car call 19 I/O<br />

17 WH GY car call 16 I/O<br />

18 GY BR car call 62 I/O<br />

19 WH PK car call 59 I/O<br />

20 PK BR car call 56 I/O<br />

21 WH BU car call 53 I/O<br />

22 BR BU car call 50 I/O<br />

23 WH RD car call 47 I/O<br />

24 BR RD car call 44 I/O<br />

25 WH BL car call 41 I/O<br />

26 BR BL car call 38 I/O<br />

27 GY GN car call 35 I/O<br />

28 YE GY car call 32 I/O<br />

29 RD GN car call 29 I/O<br />

30 YE PK car call 26 I/O<br />

31 GN BU car call 23 I/O<br />

32 YE BU car call 20 I/O<br />

33 GN RD car call 17 I/O<br />

34 YE RD car call 63 I/O<br />

35 GN BL car call 60 I/O<br />

36 YE BL car call 57 I/O<br />

37 GY BU car call 54 I/O<br />

38 RD BU car call 51 I/O<br />

39 GY RD car call 48 I/O<br />

40 PK RD car call 45 I/O<br />

41 GY BL car call 42 I/O<br />

42 PK BL car call 39 I/O<br />

43 BU BL car call 36 I/O<br />

44 RD BL car call 33 I/O<br />

45 WH BR<br />

BL<br />

car call 30 I/O<br />

46 YE GN<br />

BL<br />

car call 27 I/O<br />

47 PK GR<br />

BL<br />

car call 24 I/O<br />

48 BL BU<br />

RD<br />

car call 21 I/O<br />

49 WH GN<br />

BL<br />

car call 18 I/O<br />

50 GN BR<br />

BL<br />

Output: +24V A<br />

74 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


FPE:<br />

X2<br />

Colour<br />

code<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.5 FPE car panel extension module<br />

Car panel signals in “Dual door<br />

mode”<br />

Input/<br />

output<br />

1 WH Output: +24V A<br />

2 BR car call 29, door side B I/O<br />

3 GN car call 26, door side B I/O<br />

4 YE car call 31, door side A I/O<br />

5 GY car call 28, door side A I/O<br />

6 PK car call 25, door side A I/O<br />

7 BU car call 22, door side B I/O<br />

8 RD car call 19, door side B I/O<br />

9 BL car call 16, door side B I/O<br />

10 VT car call 21, door side A I/O<br />

11 GY PK car call 18, door side A I/O<br />

12 RD BU car call 15, door side B I/O<br />

13 WH GN car call 12, door side B I/O<br />

14 BR GN car call 09, door side B I/O<br />

15 WH YE car call 14, door side A I/O<br />

16 YE BR car call 11, door side A I/O<br />

17 WH GY car call 08, door side A I/O<br />

18 GY BR car call 30, door side B I/O<br />

19 WH PK car call 27, door side B I/O<br />

20 PK BR car call 24, door side B I/O<br />

21 WH BU car call 29, door side A I/O<br />

22 BR BU car call 26, door side A I/O<br />

23 WH RD car call 23, door side B I/O<br />

24 BR RD car call 20, door side B I/O<br />

25 WH BL car call 17, door side B I/O<br />

26 BR BL car call 22, door side A I/O<br />

27 GY GN car call 19, door side A I/O<br />

28 YE GY car call 16, door side A I/O<br />

29 RD GN car call 13, door side B I/O<br />

30 YE PK car call 10, door side B I/O<br />

31 GN BU car call 15, door side A I/O<br />

32 YE BU car call 12, door side A I/O<br />

33 GN RD car call 09, door side A I/O<br />

34 YE RD car call 31, door side B I/O<br />

35 GN BL car call 28, door side B I/O<br />

36 YE BL car call 25, door side B I/O<br />

37 GY BU car call 30, door side A I/O<br />

38 RD BU car call 27, door side A I/O<br />

39 GY RD car call 24, door side A I/O<br />

40 PK RD car call 21, door side B I/O<br />

41 GY BL car call 18, door side B I/O<br />

42 PK BL car call 23, door side A I/O<br />

43 BU BL car call 20, door side A I/O<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 75


4 Technical data<br />

4.5 FPE car panel extension module<br />

FPE:<br />

X2<br />

Colour<br />

code<br />

44 RD BL car call 17, door side A I/O<br />

45 WH BR<br />

BL<br />

car call 14, door side B I/O<br />

46 YE GN<br />

BL<br />

car call 11, door side B I/O<br />

47 PK GR<br />

BL<br />

car call 08, door side B I/O<br />

48 BL BU<br />

RD<br />

car call 13, door side A I/O<br />

49 WH GN<br />

BL<br />

car call 10, door side A I/O<br />

50 GN BR<br />

BL<br />

Output: +24V A<br />

FPE: X3 Colour<br />

code<br />

See FPM: X3 page 68<br />

Car panel signals in “Dual door<br />

mode”<br />

car call extension<br />

Input/<br />

output<br />

76 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4.6 FPA car control panel adapter<br />

Technical data See FPM<br />

Fig. 4.7 FPA car panel adapter<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.6 FPA car control panel adapter<br />

The FPA car panel adapter provides spring terminals for all car panel<br />

signals of FPM plug X4. It replaces the round 50-pin cable for wiring the car<br />

panel.<br />

The FPA is connected to plug X4 of the car panel module with the 50-pin<br />

plug X4.<br />

Switching from “Single door mode” to “Dual door mode” is done with jumper<br />

J2 of the assigned FPM (see “Jumpers” on page 66).<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 77


4 Technical data<br />

4.6 FPA car control panel adapter<br />

Terminals and plugs FPA: X4<br />

See FPM: X4 page 69<br />

Function<br />

FPA:<br />

X5<br />

Car panel signals Input/<br />

output<br />

1 car call 00 (00 door side A in dual door mode) I/O<br />

2 car call 01 (01 door side A in dual door mode) I/O<br />

3 car call 02 (02 door side A in dual door mode) I/O<br />

4 car call 03 (03 door side A in dual door mode) I/O<br />

5 car call 04 (04 door side A in dual door mode) I/O<br />

6 car call 05 (05 door side A in dual door mode) I/O<br />

7 car call 06 (06 door side A in dual door mode) I/O<br />

8 car call 07 (07 door side A in dual door mode) I/O<br />

9 car call 08 (00 door side B in dual door mode) I/O<br />

10 car call 09 (01 door side B in dual door mode) I/O<br />

11 car call 10 (02 door side B in dual door mode) I/O<br />

12 car call 11 (03 door side B in dual door mode) I/O<br />

13 car call 12 (04 door side B in dual door mode) I/O<br />

14 car call 13 (05 door side B in dual door mode) I/O<br />

15 car call 14 (06 door side B in dual door mode) I/O<br />

16 car call 15 (07 door side B in dual door mode) I/O<br />

17 Secondary car call enabling (only active with a card<br />

reader in the car)<br />

A<br />

18 GND A<br />

19 Floor display 0 (LSB) A<br />

20 Floor display 1 A<br />

21 Floor display 2 A<br />

22 Floor display 3 A<br />

23 Floor display 4 A<br />

24 Floor display 5 A<br />

25 Floor display 6 A<br />

26 Floor display 7 (MSB) A<br />

27 +24V A<br />

FPA:<br />

X6<br />

Car panel signals Input/<br />

output<br />

1 car call enable call 00 A<br />

2 car call enable call 01 A<br />

3 car call enable call 02 A<br />

4 car call enable call 03 A<br />

5 car call enable call 04 A<br />

6 car call enable call 05 A<br />

7 car call enable call 06 A<br />

78 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


FPA:<br />

X7<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.6 FPA car control panel adapter<br />

FPA:<br />

Car panel signals Input/<br />

X6<br />

output<br />

8 car call enable call 07 A<br />

9 car call enable call 08 A<br />

10 car call enable call 09 A<br />

11 car call enable call 10 A<br />

12 car call enable call 11 A<br />

13 car call enable call 12 A<br />

14 car call enable call 13 A<br />

15 car call enable call 14 A<br />

16 car call enable call 15 A<br />

17 GND A<br />

18 GND A<br />

19 GND A<br />

20 GND A<br />

21 GND A<br />

22 GND A<br />

23 GND A<br />

24 GND A<br />

25 +24V A<br />

26 +24V A<br />

27 +24V A<br />

28 +24V A<br />

29 +24V A<br />

30 +24V A<br />

Car panel signals Input/<br />

output<br />

1 +24V call acknowledge 00 A<br />

2 +24V call acknowledge 01 A<br />

3 +24V call acknowledge 02 A<br />

4 +24V call acknowledge 03 A<br />

5 +24V call acknowledge 04 A<br />

6 +24V call acknowledge 05 A<br />

7 +24V call acknowledge 06 A<br />

8 +24V call acknowledge 07 A<br />

9 +24V call acknowledge 08 A<br />

10 +24V call acknowledge 09 A<br />

11 +24V call acknowledge 10 A<br />

12 +24V call acknowledge 11 A<br />

13 +24V call acknowledge 12 A<br />

14 +24V call acknowledge 13 A<br />

15 +24V call acknowledge 14 A<br />

16 +24V call acknowledge 15 A<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 79


4 Technical data<br />

4.6 FPA car control panel adapter<br />

FPA:<br />

X7<br />

Car panel signals Input/<br />

output<br />

17 Button “Open door B” or “divider door” (see “Divider-<br />

Door” on page 117)<br />

E<br />

18 Button “Close door B” E<br />

19 Button “Open door A” E<br />

20 Button “Close door A” E<br />

21 Landing control OFF or button “loading function” (see<br />

“Pin-34 Functn” on page 123)<br />

E<br />

22 Button “Ventilator ON/OFF” E<br />

23 Key switch for fireman mode E<br />

24 Key switch for priority car E<br />

25 Direction display UP A<br />

26 Direction display DOWN A<br />

27 Overload indicator A<br />

28 Display 0 A<br />

29 Display 1 A<br />

30 Display 2 A<br />

80 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4.7 ADM landing call module<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.7 ADM landing call module<br />

The ADM landing call module provides the interface between landing call<br />

panel and FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>. The ADM is connected to the FST-2 with the<br />

LON bus.<br />

The ADM is delivered either pre-wired and installed in the landing panel or<br />

as a separate component (for installation in the shaft).<br />

Technical data Description Value Unit<br />

Supply voltage 24 ±10% V DC<br />

Power consumption 50 mA<br />

Max. switch-on current per output for<br />

approx. 40 ms<br />

600 mA<br />

Outputs Excess load and short-circuit proof<br />

Inputs/outputs Low-active<br />

Length × width × height<br />

Temperature range<br />

54 × 50 × 17.5 (2 1/<br />

8 × 2 × 11/16)<br />

mm (inch)<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +60 (32 - 140) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 81


4 Technical data<br />

4.7 ADM landing call module<br />

Fig. 4.8 ADM landing call module<br />

Jumper Unused jumpers<br />

LED<br />

Terminals and plugs<br />

- J1 (service jumper)<br />

LED Colour State Description<br />

LD1 yellow flashing briefly ADM ready<br />

flashing or<br />

permanently on<br />

Hardware error<br />

ADM: X1 Colour<br />

code<br />

See LON-<strong>Bus</strong> page 91.<br />

ADM: X2 Colour<br />

code<br />

See LON-<strong>Bus</strong> page 91.<br />

LON bus<br />

LON bus<br />

82 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4 Technical data<br />

4.7 ADM landing call module<br />

The landing call module is available with three different software versions:<br />

- ADM-S (“Single”) for single lifts<br />

- ADM-D (“Double”) for grouped lifts<br />

- ADM-E (“EAZ”) for position indicators<br />

Terminals 1 .. 20 of terminal strip X3 are assigned differently depending on<br />

the software version.<br />

ADM-X3 Function ADM-S Function ADM-D Function ADM-E<br />

1 +24V +24V +24V<br />

2 Landing call UP Landing call UP<br />

3 Landing call DOWN Landing call DOWN<br />

4 Enable landing calls Enable landing calls Chime trigger<br />

5 +24V +24V +24V<br />

6 Occupied or out of operation Occupied or out of operation Occupied or out of operation<br />

indicator<br />

indicator (left lift)<br />

indicator<br />

7 - Display “Special drive” - Display “Special drive”<br />

Floor display 5<br />

- Chime trigger<br />

- Chime trigger (left lift)<br />

- Special display 0 (“custom 0”<br />

8 Direction UP Direction UP (left lift) Direction UP<br />

9 Direction DOWN Direction DOWN (left lift) Direction DOWN<br />

10 GND GND GND<br />

11 GND GND GND<br />

12 Key switch 1 Key switch 1<br />

13 Key switch 2 Key switch 2<br />

14 - Special display 0 (“custom 0”<br />

- Floor display 4<br />

Floor display 4<br />

15 +24V +24V +24V<br />

16 Floor display 0 Direction DOWN (right lift) Floor display 0<br />

17 Floor display 1 Direction UP (right lift) Floor display 1<br />

18 Floor display 3 Occupied or out of operation<br />

indicator (right lift)<br />

Floor display 3<br />

19 Floor display 2 Chime trigger (right lift) Floor display 2<br />

20 GND GND GND<br />

The values in the table are default factory settings. Functions of individual<br />

systems can differ from those in the table. Please refer to the system<br />

specific wiring diagrams.<br />

Terminals for which more than one function is listed can be set to one of<br />

these functions in the factory. The function “Direction” can be configured as<br />

output for the direction of travel or as departure direction output in the FST-<br />

2 menu.<br />

The terminals labelled key switch 1 and 2 can be set to fire signal, smoke<br />

detector, lift off and priority landing.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 83


4 Technical data<br />

4.8 RIO-ADM remote I/O module<br />

4.8 RIO-ADM remote I/O module<br />

Technical data<br />

The RIO-ADM remote I/O module provides 12 programmable inputs/<br />

outputs at any position of the LON bus. The RIO-ADM is connected to the<br />

FST-2 with the LON bus.<br />

One controller can be equipped with up to six RIO-ADMs at different<br />

locations.<br />

Number Description Ports<br />

1 RIO-ADM 8 .. 19 Port [8] .. Port [19]<br />

2 RIO-ADM 20 .. 31 Port [20] .. Port [31]<br />

3 RIO-ADM 32 .. 43 Port [32] .. Port [43]<br />

4 RIO-ADM 44 .. 55 Port [44] .. Port [55]<br />

5 RIO-ADM 56 .. 67 Port [56] .. Port [67]<br />

6 RIO-ADM 68 .. 79 Port [68] .. Port [79]<br />

Description Value Unit<br />

Supply voltage 24 ±10% V DC<br />

Power consumption 50 mA<br />

Max. switch-on current per output for<br />

approx. 40 ms<br />

600 mA<br />

Outputs Excess load and short-circuit proof<br />

Inputs/outputs Low-active<br />

Length × width × height<br />

Temperature range<br />

54 × 50 × 17.5 (2 1/<br />

8 × 2 × 11/16)<br />

mm (inch)<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +60 (32 - 140) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

84 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Fig. 4.9 RIO-ADM remote I/O module<br />

Jumper Unused jumpers<br />

LED<br />

Terminals and plugs<br />

- J1 (service jumper)<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.8 RIO-ADM remote I/O module<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

LD1 yellow flashing<br />

briefly<br />

RIO-ADM ready<br />

flashing or<br />

permanent<br />

ly on<br />

Hardware error<br />

RIO-ADM: X1 Colour<br />

code<br />

See LON-<strong>Bus</strong> page 91.<br />

RIO-ADM: X2 Colour<br />

code<br />

See LON-<strong>Bus</strong> page 91.<br />

LON bus<br />

LON bus<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 85


4 Technical data<br />

4.8 RIO-ADM remote I/O module<br />

RIO-ADM-<br />

X3<br />

RIO-ADM<br />

8 .. 19<br />

RIO-ADM<br />

20 .. 31<br />

RIO-ADM<br />

32 .. 43<br />

RIO-ADM<br />

44 .. 55<br />

RIO-ADM<br />

56 .. 67<br />

RIO-ADM<br />

68 .. 79<br />

1 +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V<br />

2 Port [8] Port [20] Port [32] Port [44] Port [56] Port [68]<br />

3 Port [9] Port [21] Port [33] Port [45] Port [57] Port [69]<br />

4 Port [12] Port [24] Port [36] Port [48] Port [60] Port [72]<br />

5 +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V<br />

6 Port [13] Port [25] Port [37] Port [49] Port [61] Port [73]<br />

7 Port [19] Port [31] Port [43] Port [55] Port [67] Port [79]<br />

8 Port [11] Port [23] Port [35] Port [47] Port [59] Port [71]<br />

9 Port [10] Port [22] Port [34] Port [46] Port [58] Port [70]<br />

10 GND GND GND GND GND GND<br />

11<br />

12<br />

13<br />

GND GND GND GND GND GND<br />

14 Port [18] Port [30] Port [42] Port [54] Port [66] Port [78]<br />

15 +24V<br />

16 Port [14] Port [26] Port [38] Port [50] Port [62] Port [74]<br />

17 Port [15] Port [27] Port [39] Port [51] Port [63] Port [75]<br />

18 Port [17] Port [29] Port [41] Port [53] Port [65] Port [77]<br />

19 Port [16] Port [28] Port [40] Port [52] Port [64] Port [76]<br />

20 GND GND GND GND GND GND<br />

86 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4.9 RIO-FPM remote I/O module<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.9 RIO-FPM remote I/O module<br />

The RIO-FPM remote I/O module provides 40 programmable inputs/<br />

outputs at any position of the LON bus. The RIO-FPM is connected to the<br />

FST-2 with the LON bus.<br />

One controller can only be equipped with one RIO-FPM.<br />

Technical data Description Value Unit<br />

Supply voltage 24 ±10% V DC<br />

Power consumption 10 mA<br />

Max. switch-on current per output for<br />

approx. 40 ms<br />

600 mA<br />

Outputs Excess load and short-circuit proof<br />

Inputs/outputs Low-active<br />

Length × width × height<br />

Temperature range<br />

98.5 × 71 × 20 (2 1/<br />

8 × 2 × 11/16)<br />

mm (inch)<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +60 (32 - 140) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 87


4 Technical data<br />

4.9 RIO-FPM remote I/O module<br />

Fig. 4.10 RIO-FPM remote I/O module<br />

Jumper Unused jumpers<br />

LED<br />

- J1 (service jumper)<br />

All other jumpers of the RIO-FPM are currently not assigned.<br />

LED Colou<br />

r<br />

State Description<br />

LD1 yellow flashing<br />

briefly<br />

RIO-FPM ready<br />

flashing or<br />

permanent<br />

ly on<br />

Hardware error<br />

88 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Terminals and plugs<br />

RIO-FPM: X1 Colour<br />

code<br />

See LON-<strong>Bus</strong> page 91.<br />

RIO-FPM: X2 Colour<br />

code<br />

See LON-<strong>Bus</strong> page 91.<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.9 RIO-FPM remote I/O module<br />

LON bus<br />

LON bus<br />

The following colour code table is based on the 50-pin standard cable for<br />

wiring the car control panel. Individual systems can use different colour<br />

codes.<br />

RIO-FPM: X4 Colour code Function<br />

1 WH Port [13]<br />

2 BR Port [15]<br />

3 GN Port [9]<br />

4 YE Port [11]<br />

5 GY Port [45]<br />

6 PK Port [42]<br />

7 BU Port [44]<br />

8 RD +24V<br />

9 BL Port [38]<br />

10 VT Port [35]<br />

11 GY PK Port [32]<br />

12 RD BU Port [31]<br />

13 WH GN Port [28]<br />

14 BR GN Port [25]<br />

15 WH YE Port [22]<br />

16 YE BR Port [19]<br />

17 WH GY Port [16]<br />

18 GY BR 0V / GND<br />

19 WH PK 0V / GND<br />

20 PK BR 0V / GND<br />

21 WH BU 0V / GND<br />

22 BR BU +24V<br />

23 WH RD +24V<br />

24 BR RD +24V<br />

25 WH BL Port [39]<br />

26 BR BL Port [36]<br />

27 GY GN Port [33]<br />

28 YE GY Port [40]<br />

29 RD GN Port [29]<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 89


4 Technical data<br />

4.9 RIO-FPM remote I/O module<br />

RIO-FPM: X4 Colour code Function<br />

30 YE PK Port [26]<br />

31 GN BU Port [23]<br />

32 YE BU Port [20]<br />

33 GN RD Port [17]<br />

34 YE RD Port [12]<br />

35 GN BL Port [14]<br />

36 YE BL Port [8]<br />

37 GY BU Port [10]<br />

38 RD BU Port [46]<br />

39 GY RD Port [47]<br />

40 PK RD Port [43]<br />

41 GY BL 0V / GND<br />

42 PK BL Port [37]<br />

43 BU BL Port [34]<br />

44 RD BL Port [41]<br />

45 WH BR BL Port [30]<br />

46 YE GN BL Port [27]<br />

47 PK GR BL Port [24]<br />

48 BL BU RD Port [21]<br />

49 WH GN BL Port [18]<br />

50 GN BR BL +24V<br />

90 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


4.10 LON bus<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.10 LON bus<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> is connected to the FST-2 components with the LON<br />

bus. The number of LON bus cables depends on the number of electronic<br />

assemblies.<br />

All bus inputs and outputs not in use must be equipped with a<br />

terminal resistance (terminator).<br />

All bus cables of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> must be installed with<br />

sufficient strain relief!<br />

<strong>Bus</strong> cables must only be connected or disconnected when they are<br />

not live!<br />

Technical data Description Value Unit<br />

Hose with Color Code<br />

Fig. 4.11 LON bus components<br />

Supply voltage<br />

Temperature range<br />

24 ±10% V DC<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +60 (32 - 140) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

Weight 0.072 (0.8) kg/m (oz/ft)<br />

Max cable length 1000 (3280) m (ft)<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 91


4 Technical data<br />

4.11 Trailing ribbon cable<br />

Colour code shrinkable<br />

tubing<br />

Plugs<br />

4.11 Trailing ribbon cable<br />

Technical data<br />

Colour Length of bus cable<br />

BL 0.5m (20")<br />

RD 1.0m (40")<br />

WH 3.0m (10 ft)<br />

YE 5.0m (16 ft)<br />

BU 7.0m (23 ft)<br />

GN 10.0m (33 ft)<br />

BL 15.0m (50 ft)<br />

RD 20.0m (65 ft)<br />

X... Colour<br />

code<br />

1 BL <strong>Bus</strong> signal A<br />

2 WH <strong>Bus</strong> signal B<br />

3 RD +24V / 4A<br />

4 VT 0V / GND<br />

LON bus plug<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> is connected to the electronic assemblies of the car<br />

with the trailing ribbon cable. The trailing cable also powers to the car<br />

components and transmits safety relevant signals.<br />

Plugs of the trailing cable must only be connected or disconnected<br />

when they are not live!<br />

Description Value Unit<br />

Supply voltage 24 ±10% V DC<br />

Temperature range<br />

230 ± 10% V AC<br />

Storage / transport -20 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Operation<br />

Relative humidity<br />

±0 - +70 (-4 - +158) °C (°F)<br />

Storage / transport 5 - 95 %<br />

Operation 15 - 85 %<br />

Weight 0,7 (8) kg/m (oz/ft)<br />

Max. free suspension height 50 (164) m (ft)<br />

Min. bending radius (movable) 0.5 (20) m (in)<br />

92 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


FST X31<br />

FST X30<br />

FST X32<br />

Fig. 4.12 Trailing ribbon cable<br />

Trailing cable<br />

Connect to metal bolts<br />

(Earth)<br />

Wire<br />

identifica<br />

tion<br />

from<br />

FST-2<br />

FSM X31<br />

4 Technical data<br />

4.11 Trailing ribbon cable<br />

FSM X30<br />

Connect to plastic bolt<br />

FSM X32<br />

Function to<br />

FSM<br />

1 X32.1 Car door side A (VST_TA) X32.1<br />

2 X32.2 Car door side B (VST_TB) X32.2<br />

3 X32.3 Car door side C (VST_TC) X32.3<br />

4 X32.4 Emergency stop car<br />

(VST_FKNH)<br />

X32.4<br />

5 X32.5 Bypass UP (VST_UAUF) X32.5<br />

6 X32.6 bypass DOWN (VST_UAB) X32.6<br />

7 X32.7 bypass ON (VST_UEIN) X32.7<br />

8 X32.8 bypass (VST_UMG) X32.8<br />

9 X32.9 N safety circuit (VST_N) X32.9<br />

10 X30.11 0V / GND X30.11<br />

11 X30.22 +24V X30.22<br />

12 X30.10 +HSG X30.10<br />

13 X30.13 ALARM X30.13<br />

14 X30.1 +24V DC X30.1<br />

15 X30.12 0V / GND X30.12<br />

16 X31.1 Neutral conductor (N) X31.1<br />

17 X31.2 Phase L1 (L1) X31.2<br />

18 X31.3 Phase L2 (L2) X31.3<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 93


4 Technical data<br />

4.11 Trailing ribbon cable<br />

Colour code according to ICE<br />

60189-2<br />

Wire from<br />

Function to<br />

identifica<br />

tion<br />

FST-2<br />

FSM<br />

19 X31.4 Phase L3 (L3) X31.4<br />

20 X31.5 Neutral conductor car light (N4) X31.5<br />

21 X31.6 Spare (LA4) X31.6<br />

22 X31.7 Shaft light button X31.7<br />

23 X31.8 Shaft light button X31.8<br />

yellow /<br />

green<br />

X31.9 Protective conductor (PE) X31.9<br />

VT (S1) X30.21 AWE-BU X30.21<br />

TQ (S1) X30.9 AWE+BU X30.9<br />

WH (S1) X30.20 UPN-B X30.20<br />

BU (S1) X30.8 UPN-A X30.8<br />

VT (S2) X30.18 SPR-D X30.18<br />

TQ (S2) X30.6 SPR-C X30.6<br />

WH (S2) X30.17 SPR-B X30.17<br />

OR (S2) X30.5 SPR-A X30.5<br />

VT (S3) X30.16 USP+R X30.16<br />

TQ (S3) X30.4 UPSP-R X30.4<br />

WH (S3) X30.3 USP+T X30.2<br />

GN (S3) X30.15 USP-T X30.15<br />

VT (S4) X30.19 ENCODER B X30.19<br />

TQ (S4) X30.7 ENCODER A X30.7<br />

WH (S4) X30.14 CBUS-A X30.14<br />

BN (S4) X30.2 CBUS-A X30.2<br />

S1 .. S4 = four wires each, twisted with shielding<br />

Code Colour<br />

VT Violet<br />

TQ Turquoise<br />

WH White<br />

BU Blue<br />

OR Orange<br />

GN Green<br />

BN Brown<br />

94 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

FST software parameters are set using the FST-2 user interface or the<br />

HHT handheld terminal together with the FST menu. The FST menu is<br />

displayed as a menu tree divided into submenus and menu items.<br />

Security levels NEW LIFT has divided the menu items of the FST-2 into three security<br />

levels.<br />

Level Access Activity<br />

high unlimited Commissioning<br />

medium limited Servicing<br />

low menus not editable Maintenance<br />

Setting passwords Each security level can be protected with a four digit password. The menu<br />

items of the lower levels can be accessed with the password for the high<br />

security level. The test menu can be accessed with password protection at<br />

any time.<br />

The default setting for the password is “0000”.<br />

Menu tree All functions and settings of the menu tree are explained below.<br />

Actions are marked with � in the column “setting range”.<br />

Optional Parametrising can also be done using the FST Editor via the serial<br />

interface or via remote data transmission.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 95


5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

Fig. 5.1 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> menu tree (part 1)<br />

96 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Fig. 5.2 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> menu tree (part 2)<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 97


5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

Fig. 5.3 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> menu tree (part 3)<br />

98 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Fig. 5.4 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> menu tree (part 4)<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 99


5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

Fig. 5.5 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> menu tree (part 5)<br />

100 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Fig. 5.6 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> menu tree (part 6)<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 101


5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

Fig. 5.7 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> menu tree (part 7)<br />

102 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Fig. 5.8 FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> menu tree (part 8)<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.1 General<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 103


5 Menu tree<br />

5.2 MAIN MENU – Service<br />

5.2 MAIN MENU – Service<br />

All menu items with adjustable values can be deactivated by entering the<br />

value “0”.<br />

�<br />

�<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Error List Displays the last 100 error messages (see Chapter 8).<br />

Clear Error List Delete entries in the error list. YES<br />

NO<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

YES<br />

Clear All Counters<br />

NO<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Set Interval<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Motor-Hours –<br />

Since Day1<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Motor-Hours –<br />

Current<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Motor-Hours –<br />

To Service<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Motor-Hours –<br />

Interval<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Drives –<br />

Since Day1<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Drives –<br />

Current<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Drives –<br />

To Service<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Drives –<br />

Interval<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Door Cycles –<br />

Since Day1<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Door Cycles –<br />

Current<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Door Cycles –<br />

To Service<br />

The controller has three internal service counters for drives,<br />

motor hours and door cycles. A service interval can be<br />

allocated to each counter so that a due service is signalled via<br />

a programmable input/output. The counter values for<br />

Motor-Hours, Drives and Door Cycles can be<br />

reset here (e.g. after a service).<br />

Overwrite counter values To Service with the values of<br />

the Interval counters (e.g. after a service).<br />

Motor hours since commissioning of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>.<br />

This value cannot be reset.<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

Read only<br />

Motor hours since last Clear All Counters. Read only<br />

Motor hours remaining to the next service. Read only<br />

Motor hours of the maintenance interval. 0 .. 9999 h<br />

Drives since commissioning of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>. This<br />

value cannot be reset.<br />

Read only<br />

Drives since last Clear All Counters. Read only<br />

Drives remaining to the next service. Read only<br />

Drives of the maintenance interval. 0 .. 99999<br />

Door cycles since commissioning of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>.<br />

This value cannot be reset.<br />

Read only<br />

Door cycles since last Clear All Counters. Read only<br />

Door cycles remaining to the next service. Read only<br />

104 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


5 Menu tree<br />

5.2 MAIN MENU – Service<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Service-Counters –<br />

Door Cycles –<br />

Interval<br />

Door cycles of the maintenance interval. 0 .. 99999<br />

� Statistics RESET Reset the internal drive and call statistics of the FST-2. YES<br />

NO<br />

Statistics At present, the statistic functions can only be accessed via<br />

remote data transmission.<br />

Error Messages Enable output of error messages (programmable inputs/<br />

outputs, modem, PAM, fax).<br />

after Error: LED... Function of the error LED on the FST-2 board after adding a<br />

new entry to the error list.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 105<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

FLASHING<br />

OFF


5 Menu tree<br />

5.3 MAIN MENU – Drive<br />

5.3 MAIN MENU – Drive<br />

All menu items with adjustable values can be deactivated by entering the<br />

value “0”.<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Start monitoring Maximum time permitted between pre-selection of the drive<br />

and leaving the levelling position. If the car does not leave the<br />

levelling position during the set time, the system will be shut<br />

down with DRM-START PROBLEM (see “DRM–START<br />

PROBLEM” on page 176).<br />

Drive type Drive type used. Can be selected from a list with all common<br />

drive types.<br />

Brake monitoring Monitoring of the drive brake (brake bleed contact) via FST X1<br />

terminal 19/20. When starting, input FST X1 terminal 19/20<br />

must be activated during the set Brake delay (+24V).<br />

When stopping, the input must be deactivated during the set<br />

Brake delay. If this fails, the system will be shut down<br />

with DRM-BRAKE FAILURE (see “DRM-BRAKE FAILURE”<br />

on page 177).<br />

Brake delay Maximum permitted time between activation of the drive brake<br />

and confirmation from the brake bleed contact on terminal<br />

FST X1 19/20 (see Brake monitoring).<br />

Drive speeds<br />

Possible<br />

Drive speeds<br />

Enabled<br />

Drive speeds<br />

Calibrated<br />

Possible drive speeds V8 .. V1 of the set drive type (“1” stands<br />

for speed possible).<br />

Enabled drive speeds V8 .. V1 of the set drive type (“1” stands<br />

for speed enabled). Only speeds displayed with “1” in<br />

Possible can be enabled!<br />

Drive speeds V8 .. V1 successfully measured during the<br />

calibration run (“1” stands for speed calibrated). After a<br />

successful calibration run, all speeds displayed with “1” in<br />

Enabled must be displayed with “1” in Calibrated!<br />

Motor monitoring Monitoring of the motor temperature via FST X1 terminal 22.<br />

If the terminal is activated (+24V), the system will be shut<br />

down with<br />

DRM-MOTOR FAILURE (see “DRM-MOTOR FAILURE” on<br />

page 177).<br />

Motor run-on Run-on time of the drive after the levelling position has been<br />

reached. Only required for improving the performance of<br />

unregulated drives.<br />

Relevelling Relevelling with car and shaft doors open. This parameter<br />

must only be activated when using the A6 Safety Circuit! The<br />

following steps are required to deactivate an integrated A6<br />

Safety Circuit:<br />

- Set Pre-Opening = NO<br />

- Set Relevelling = NO<br />

- Disconnect power supply of the safety circuit (terminal 518/<br />

519)<br />

Relevelling delay Delay between recognising that the car is not levelled and<br />

starting relevelling. This parameter guarantees smooth<br />

relevelling for swaying cars.<br />

0 .. 30 sec<br />

106 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 9999 ms<br />

Read only<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111<br />

Read only<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 2 sec<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 9999 msec


Speed correction function If the drive is equipped with a speed correction function, this<br />

parameter can be activated to optimise floor to floor travel (see<br />

page 109).<br />

Emergency stop: Car calls Handling of pending car calls after a safety circuit interruption<br />

in the emergency stop area (before terminal 33) while the car<br />

was moving.<br />

Emergency stop: Stop Handling of landing calls after a safety circuit interruption in<br />

the emergency stop area (before terminal 33) while the car<br />

was moving.<br />

- YES: Landing calls are blocked. The car can only be moved<br />

with a car command.<br />

- NO: Pending landing calls are deleted. Landing calls will be<br />

enabled again after the safety circuit has been closed.<br />

Homing time Maximum time without a car call before an hydraulic lift travels<br />

to the lowest floor automatically.<br />

Contactor monitoring Monitoring of the main contactors on FST X1 terminal 23 via<br />

auxiliary contacts (normally closed). When stopping, input<br />

FST X1 terminal 23 must be activated during the set<br />

Mon. Time (+24V). If this fails, the system<br />

Contactor<br />

will be shut down DRM-CONTACTOR MON. with (see<br />

“DRM-CONTACTOR MONIT.” on page 178).<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.3 MAIN MENU – Drive<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 107<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

KEEP<br />

DELETE<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 15 min<br />

Contactor Mon. Time Delay between stopping and activation of the contactor<br />

monitoring function.<br />

0 .. 9999 msec<br />

Delay monitoring Monitoring of the delay at end floors YES<br />

NO<br />

Change time Minimum delay when switching the main contactors (fast to<br />

slow) of unregulated lift motors.<br />

0 .. 0.5 sec<br />

Stop Max Maximum number of door contact or locking device<br />

interruptions (terminals 37 and 40) during a drive before all<br />

calls will be deleted (see “OPEN DOOR LOCK” on page 175).<br />

The system will not be shut down, it is waiting for new calls.<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Function<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Hydr.Unit<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Raise distance<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Raise Time Max<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Solenoid Pawl<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Door-Lock<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Fine pump UP<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Fine pump DN<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Low Press. Ctrl<br />

Activate Pawl Control control for hydraulic building hoists.<br />

Additional modules are required for Pawl Control control (see<br />

system description of the Pawl Control).<br />

Hydraulic aggregate (see system description of the Pawl<br />

Control).<br />

<strong>Lift</strong>ing distance for extending/retracting the Pawl Control (see<br />

description of the Pawl Control).<br />

Maximum lifting time (see system description of the Pawl<br />

Control).<br />

Activate the electric (not hydraulic) Pawl Control (see<br />

description of the Pawl Control).<br />

Block doors when the Pawl Control is retracted (see system<br />

description of the Pawl Control).<br />

Activate additional pump for lifting (see system description of<br />

the Pawl Control).<br />

Activate additional valve for lowering (see system description<br />

of the Pawl Control).<br />

Re-pump to avoid slack in the cable with the car loaded (see<br />

system description of the Pawl Control).<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 10<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OPTIMISED<br />

GIEHL<br />

BER.ELRV<br />

OILDYNAM<br />

LEISTRITZ<br />

0 .. 255 mm<br />

0 .. 255 sec<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO


5 Menu tree<br />

5.3 MAIN MENU – Drive<br />

Pawl Control<br />

Overload Ctrl<br />

Activate overload measuring by lifting the car briefly (see<br />

system description of the Pawl Control).<br />

Warm-up drive Automatic warm-up drive to the top floor. This function<br />

prevents cooling down of the hydraulic oil. The timer starts<br />

after the homing drive is completed.<br />

Quick Start<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Special params –<br />

Time 1<br />

Special params –<br />

Time 2<br />

Special params –<br />

Time 3<br />

Special params –<br />

Time 4<br />

Special params –<br />

Time 5<br />

Special params –<br />

Time 6<br />

Special params –<br />

Time 7<br />

Special params –<br />

Switch 1<br />

Special params –<br />

Switch 2<br />

Special params –<br />

Switch 3<br />

Special params –<br />

Switch 4<br />

Special params –<br />

Switch 5<br />

Special params –<br />

Switch 6<br />

If quick start is enabled, the drive is already powered up when<br />

the car doors are closing so that the car starts moving quicker.<br />

This requires additional switches and signals (see system<br />

description of the quick start function).<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming. Only<br />

change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Special parameters for drive specific programming.<br />

Only change this value after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

0 .. 255 sec<br />

0 .. 9999 min<br />

108 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 65535 msec<br />

0 .. 65535 msec<br />

0 .. 65535 msec<br />

0 .. 65535 msec<br />

0 .. 65535 msec<br />

0 .. 65535 msec<br />

0 .. 65535 msec<br />

ON �<br />

OFF<br />

ON �<br />

OFF<br />

ON �<br />

OFF<br />

ON �<br />

OFF<br />

ON �<br />

OFF<br />

ON �<br />

OFF


5 Menu tree<br />

5.3 MAIN MENU – Drive<br />

Speed correction function After a successful calibration drive, the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> knows the<br />

acceleration and deceleration characteristics for each drive speed. This<br />

enables the controller to select the optimum drive speed for the distance to<br />

be covered.<br />

The parameter Speed correction function determines if the<br />

maximum selected drive speed must be reached during each drive (travel<br />

distance > acceleration distance + braking distance + crawling distance),<br />

or if the drive has a speed correction function to optimise the drive curve<br />

without reaching the maximum speed (travel distance > deceleration<br />

distance + crawling distance).<br />

Example: Travel from floor A to floor B (distance between floors:<br />

2.6m/8ft 6")<br />

- Nominal speed V2: Braking distance = 2m (6ft 6"), acceleration distance<br />

= 2m (6ft 6")<br />

- Intermediate speed V1: Braking distance = 1m (3ft 3"), acceleration<br />

distance = 1m (3ft 3")<br />

- Crawling distance = 0.05m (2")<br />

Drive from A to B without speed correction:<br />

Speed V1 is selected, because 2.6m (8ft 6") > 1m (3ft 3") + 1m (3ft 3") +<br />

0.05m (2")<br />

Fig. 5.9 Drive without speed correction function<br />

Drive from A to B with speed correction function enabled:<br />

Speed V2 is selected, because 2.6m (8ft 6") > 2m (6ft 6")+ 0.05m (2")<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 109


5 Menu tree<br />

5.3 MAIN MENU – Drive<br />

Fig. 5.10 Drive with speed correction function<br />

110 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

All menu items with adjustable values can be deactivated by entering the<br />

value “0”.<br />

�<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Installation –<br />

Calibration drive<br />

Installation –<br />

Learn drive<br />

Installation –<br />

Set floor [n]<br />

Installation –<br />

Correct-levelling<br />

Installation –<br />

Cal. V-tolerance<br />

Installation –<br />

Installation mode<br />

Prio-Landing/Car –<br />

Landing prio. type<br />

Prio-Landing/Car –<br />

Landing prio. time<br />

Prio-Landing/Car –<br />

Landing prio. prog.<br />

Prio-Landing/Car –<br />

Car prio. type<br />

Carry out calibration drive. During a calibration drive, four<br />

measuring drives are performed for each drive speed. The<br />

exact acceleration and braking behaviour for each speed is<br />

determined automatically. The controller uses this information<br />

to select the optimum speed and the correct braking point for<br />

each drive.<br />

Carry out learn drive. During the learn drive, the car<br />

automatically travels upwards through the entire shaft at<br />

inspection speed. The controller determines the exact position<br />

of the solenoids for solenoid switches “Zone B”, “Correction<br />

bottom” and “Correction top”. The levelling positions of all<br />

floors are automatically centred in the door zones after the<br />

learn drive! The learn drive is only required when using<br />

incremental positioning.<br />

The current position of the car is entered as a point of<br />

reference for the entire shaft. The levelling positions of the<br />

remaining floors are adjusted to the current position of the car.<br />

Correction of the levelling position on the floor where the car<br />

is currently located. The measured value must be entered (car<br />

is too high: positive sign +; car is too low: negative sign -).<br />

Measuring tolerance when measuring the speed of the<br />

calibration run. The set value should only be changed after<br />

consulting NEW LIFT. The calibration results are influenced<br />

by the measuring tolerance.<br />

Suppresses error messages that would prevent installation<br />

drives if the controller has not yet been fully commissioned.<br />

Enables installation drives using the inspection and auxiliary<br />

controls without connecting encoder and car control module.<br />

Activation type “Priority landing”.<br />

- Hard: All car and landing calls are deleted.<br />

- Soft: Car calls remain, landing calls are deleted.<br />

Delay for switching off “Priority landing” after reaching the<br />

target floor.<br />

Variations of “Priority landing”:<br />

- Auto 1: After reaching the target floor, the “Priority landing”<br />

state remains active until the next car call.<br />

- Auto 2: After reaching the target floor, “Priority car” is<br />

activated automatically.<br />

- Standard: When reaching the target floor, the system<br />

switches to normal operation after the “Landing prio.<br />

time” has elapsed.<br />

Activation type “Priority car”<br />

- Hard: All car and landing calls are deleted.<br />

- Soft: Car calls remain, landing calls are deleted if Keep<br />

landing calls = NO is set.<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

0 .. top floor<br />

-250 .. 250 mm<br />

1 .. 100 %<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 111<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

Hard<br />

Soft<br />

0 .. 999 sec<br />

Auto 1<br />

Auto 2<br />

Standard<br />

Hard<br />

Soft


5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Prio-Landing/Car –<br />

Keep landing calls<br />

Prio-Landing/Car –<br />

SuperPrio-Control<br />

Prio-Landing/Car –<br />

SuperPrio-Text<br />

Park drive –<br />

Enabling<br />

Park drive –<br />

Programs<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Mode<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Car calls<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Landing calls<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Doors<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Floor-Limit<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Lo-Limit<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Hi-Limit<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Time-Limit<br />

Auto test drive –<br />

Interval<br />

LON configuration<br />

Search LON modules<br />

LON configuration<br />

Show LON modules<br />

After activating “soft” priority car, landing calls will also be<br />

kept.<br />

112 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Enable park drive program. YES<br />

NO<br />

Parking drive characteristics of the lift system (see “Park drive<br />

programs” on page 121).<br />

Automatic call generation for testing purposes. Drive<br />

characteristics of the Auto test drive:<br />

- Sequence: Floors are approached sequentially<br />

(0,1,2,3,2,1,0,1,...)<br />

- Shuttle: Car shuttles between “Lo-Limit” and “Hi-Limit”.<br />

- Random: Floors are approached in a random sequence.<br />

Automatically generated car calls during the auto test drive. YES<br />

NO<br />

Automatically generated landing calls during the auto test<br />

drive.<br />

Enables the car doors during the auto test drive. The set value<br />

corresponds to the following bit mask:<br />

When activated, only floors between Lo-Limit and Hi-<br />

Limit will be approached.<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111<br />

Sequence<br />

Shuttle<br />

Random<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 7<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Lowest floor of the auto test drive. 0 .. top floor<br />

Highest floor of the auto test drive. 0 .. top floor<br />

The auto test drive will be disabled automatically after two<br />

hours.<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Time between two commands during the auto test drive. 0 .. 255 sec<br />

A bus scan is carried out to determine the modules connected<br />

to the bus. All LON modules connected to the bus will be<br />

entered in a table that can be displayed with Show LON<br />

modules.<br />

Displays all LON modules connected to the bus. The list of<br />

LON modules is generated/updated with the menu item<br />

LON modules. See “Show LON modules” on<br />

Search<br />

page 121.<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

Read only


LON configuration<br />

LON Edit Enabe<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

LMS floor-locking<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

FST fax enable<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Tel. Number FST<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Modem number 1<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Modem number 2<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Fax number 1<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Fax number 2<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Dial method<br />

Enable editing mode of the LON modules. In editing mode, the<br />

properties of certain LON modules can be changed by<br />

changing the number codes in “Show LON modules” (see<br />

system description of the LON byte editor).<br />

Enable external floor-locking via remote data transmission<br />

(LMS <strong>Lift</strong> Monitoring System).<br />

Enables all fax functions (see Installation & Commissioning –<br />

Fax modem).<br />

Phone number of the FST modem (see Installation &<br />

Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

1st phone number for a modem connection (see Installation &<br />

Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

2nd phone number for a modem connection (see Installation<br />

& Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

1st phone number for a fax connection (see Installation &<br />

Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Modem InitString 1<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Modem InitString 2<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

FAX InitString 1<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

FAX InitString 2<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Dial attempts fax<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Pause between dial<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Fax numbers used<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

FAX auto send<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Fax control<br />

Modem / Fax / LMS<br />

Send test fax<br />

I/O Configuration –<br />

I/O Ports –<br />

RAW<br />

2nd phone number for a fax connection (see Installation &<br />

Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

Type of telephone network (see Installation & Commissioning<br />

– Fax modem).<br />

Initialisation of modem 1, ASCII string according to modem<br />

documentation (see Installation & Commissioning – Fax<br />

modem).<br />

Initialisation of modem 2, ASCII string according to modem<br />

documentation (see Installation & Commissioning – Fax<br />

modem).<br />

Initialisation of fax 1, ASCII string according to modem<br />

documentation (see Installation & Commissioning – Fax<br />

modem).<br />

Initialisation of fax 2, ASCII string according to modem<br />

documentation (see Installation & Commissioning – Fax<br />

modem).<br />

Dialling attempts to establish a fax connection (see Installation<br />

& Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

Time between two dial attempts of the modem (see<br />

Installation & Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

Enables fax numbers (see Installation & Commissioning – Fax<br />

modem).<br />

Time between two automatic fax reports (see Installation &<br />

Commissioning – Fax modem).<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 113<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

ASCII<br />

ASCII<br />

ASCII<br />

ASCII<br />

ASCII<br />

Tone-dial<br />

Pulse-dial<br />

ISDN<br />

ASCII<br />

ASCII<br />

ASCII<br />

ASCII<br />

0 .. 10<br />

0 .. 1000 sec<br />

0 .. 2<br />

OFF<br />

HOURLY<br />

DAILY<br />

WEEKLY<br />

MONTHLY<br />

See Installation & Commissioning – Fax modem. 0000000000000000 ..<br />

1111111111111111<br />

See Installation & Commissioning – Fax modem. � YES<br />

NO<br />

Configure programmable inputs/outputs (see “Programmable<br />

inputs and outputs” on page 147).<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111


5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

I/O Configuration –<br />

I/O Flags –<br />

Delay<br />

I/O Configuration –<br />

I/O Flags –<br />

MASK<br />

I/O Configuration –<br />

I/O Flags –<br />

CTRL<br />

I/O Configuration –<br />

I/O Error –<br />

ID<br />

I/O Configuration –<br />

I/O Error –<br />

CTRL<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

Use text<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

EAZ text<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

Bottom Flr. Car<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

Bottom Flr. Hall<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

Target-Floor Car<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

LON-EAZ Type<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

LON-EAZ Number<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

LON-EAZ Config.<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

LON-EAZ Download<br />

Delay of inputs and outputs (see “Programmable inputs and<br />

outputs” on page 147).<br />

Depending on Bit1 of menu item CTRL, seconds or switching<br />

operations must be set.<br />

System state that changes an input/output to active (see<br />

“Programmable inputs and outputs” on page 147).<br />

Flag control (see “Programmable inputs and outputs” on<br />

page 147).<br />

Error type to activate error output (see “Programmable inputs<br />

and outputs” on page 147).<br />

Configuration of error output (see “Programmable inputs and<br />

outputs” on page 147).<br />

Enable user defined floor names.<br />

- YES: A two-digit floor name can be entered in EAZ text<br />

for each floor. This name will be used by the FST display and<br />

by all LON position indicators.<br />

- NO: Floor names 0,1,2,.. will be used by the FST display and<br />

by all LON position indicators.<br />

0 .. 9999<br />

00000000 ..<br />

FFFFFFFF<br />

00 .. FF<br />

NO ERROR ...<br />

CAR LIGHT FAILURE<br />

00 .. FF<br />

114 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Two-digit name for each floor (see Use text). 2-digit ASCII<br />

Initial value for the position indicator code issued on FPM X4.<br />

- 0: Code starts at bottom floor with “00000000”.<br />

- 1: Code starts at bottom floor with “00000001”.<br />

The type of position indicator code can be set in EAZ type<br />

(see “Car panel module –” on page 116).<br />

Initial value for the position indicator code issued on ADM X3.<br />

- 0: Code starts at bottom floor with “00000”.<br />

- 1: Code starts at bottom floor with “00001”.<br />

The type of position indicator code can be set ADM-EAZ<br />

in<br />

(see “ADM-EAZ Coding” on page 119).<br />

type<br />

Activation of position indicators at the deceleration point when<br />

approaching a floor.<br />

- Show Target Floor: The target floor is displayed at the<br />

deceleration point. As a consequence, floor names could be<br />

skipped if the deceleration distance covers multiple floors.<br />

- Show Physical Floor: The target floor is displayed after<br />

reaching the levelling position.<br />

Type of connected LON position indicators. Depending on the<br />

type, the options set in LON EAZ Config have different<br />

meanings (see description of the position indicator).<br />

LON position indicator selected for parametrising. Each<br />

connected LON position indicator has a unique number (0 ..<br />

255). If 255 is set here, the settings apply to all connected<br />

LON indicators.<br />

Options for the connected LON position indicators. Depending<br />

on the LON-EAZ type, the options set here have different<br />

meanings (see description of the position indicator).<br />

Transfer a configuration file from an inserted PC-Card to the<br />

LON indicator selected in LON-EAZ Number.<br />

0 .. 1<br />

0 .. 1<br />

Show Target Floor<br />

Show Physical Floor<br />

EAZ-256<br />

EAZ-40/64<br />

EAZ-VFD/LCD<br />

0 .. 255<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111<br />

YES �<br />

NO


EAZ Configuration –<br />

IRT-code<br />

EAZ Configuration –<br />

Display Dimming<br />

Chime functions –<br />

Chime enabled<br />

Chime functions –<br />

Chime duration<br />

Chime functions –<br />

Chime trigger<br />

Chime functions –<br />

Chime when in floor<br />

Chime functions –<br />

Landing chime<br />

ID –<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> ID<br />

Access code for the remote function. With indicator types<br />

EAZ-VFD and EAZ-LCD, the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> can be<br />

parametrised from the indicator using the FST-IRT infrared<br />

remote control. This requires entering the access code set<br />

here (see Quick Guide – FST-IRT Remote Control).<br />

Dimming of LON display EAZ-256 when the car light is off to<br />

reduce energy consumption. This function can be activated<br />

separately for car and landing indicators.<br />

- 00000000: Dimming function off.<br />

- 00000001: Only car indicators are dimmed.<br />

- 00000010: Only landing indicators are dimmed.<br />

- 00000011: All indicators (car and landing) are dimmed.<br />

Chime sounds for car and/or landing calls. YES<br />

NO<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

ID –<br />

System ID<br />

ID –<br />

NEW-Factory No.<br />

ID –<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> factory no.<br />

ID –<br />

Project-Code<br />

Group settings –<br />

GST menu<br />

Group settings –<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> ID<br />

Group settings –<br />

Group member<br />

Group settings –<br />

Group Floor Offset<br />

Group settings –<br />

Flr Offset-Car<br />

Group settings –<br />

Flr Offset-Landing<br />

00000 .. 99999<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111<br />

Impulse length of the chime trigger signal. 0 .. 5 sec<br />

Distance of the car from the levelling position of the target floor<br />

that triggers the chime.<br />

The chime also sounds when the car is already at the target<br />

floor and the car doors are closed if a landing call is placed.<br />

0 .. 9999 mm<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 115<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Chime sounds for landing and/or car calls. Landing calls<br />

Landing + car calls<br />

Identifies the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> in group operation.<br />

The setting must correspond to the jumper settings (JK1, JK2<br />

and JK3) on the FSM car control module (see “Jumper JT” on<br />

page 55) and on the FPM car panel module (“Jumpers” on<br />

page 40)! If this fails, the system will be shut down with DRM-<br />

CAR COMMS FAIL (see “DRM-CAR COMMS FAIL” on<br />

page 177). Single lifts are always set to lift A.<br />

System location and identification of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> for<br />

modem, remote data transmission and PAM (LMS).<br />

NEW LIFT factory number of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> (set in the<br />

factory).<br />

A H<br />

20-digit ASCII<br />

20-digit ASCII<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> manufacturer’s factory number of the system. 20-digit ASCII<br />

Code number of a project specific software version. Only<br />

issued for special projects, do not change!<br />

See GST <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />

See <strong>Lift</strong> ID. A H<br />

Integrate FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> in a GST Group <strong>Controller</strong> (see<br />

GST <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

Floor offset in relation to the lowest floor in the group (see GST<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

The value set in Group Floor Offset is the lowest floor<br />

for the car position indicators (if not set, the value „0“ will be<br />

used, see GST <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

The value set in Group Floor Offset is the lowest floor<br />

for the landing position indicators (if not set, the value „0“ will<br />

be used, see GST <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

000000 ..<br />

999999<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 15<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO


5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Group settings –<br />

ADM-<strong>Bus</strong> Mask-1<br />

Group settings –<br />

ADM-<strong>Bus</strong> Mask-2<br />

Anti nuisance –<br />

Maximum Car Calls<br />

Anti nuisance –<br />

Stops w/o Exit<br />

Anti nuisance –<br />

Empty Car Sense<br />

Anti Nuisance –<br />

Call Direction<br />

Anti nuisance –<br />

Always Clear UP/DN<br />

Car ventilator –<br />

Control mode<br />

Car ventilator –<br />

Vent. Off-Delay<br />

Car ventilator –<br />

Output inverted<br />

Car light –<br />

Car light Off-Delay<br />

Car light –<br />

Monitoring<br />

Car light –<br />

Evac. – Light Off<br />

Car panel module –<br />

EAZ type<br />

Allocation of the FST-2 to the individual bus cables of the<br />

group in normal mode (see “ADM bus masks” on page 122<br />

and GST <strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

Allocation of the FST-2 to the individual bus cables of the<br />

group in simplex mode (“separated group mode”, see GST<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>).<br />

Maximum permitted number of car calls acknowledged at a<br />

time. This parameter helps prevent unnecessary drives<br />

caused by car calls. A reasonable number is the specified<br />

maximum number of passengers.<br />

All car calls will be cleared if the photocell does not trigger for<br />

the set number of stops. This parameter helps prevent<br />

unnecessary drives caused by car calls.<br />

If the input “Empty Car Sense” is activated, no more car calls<br />

will be accepted (see “FSM car control module” on page 53).<br />

This parameter helps prevent unnecessary drives caused by<br />

car calls. Only activate this function if the weight sensor is<br />

equipped with an “Empty Car Sense” (Level-Empty) contact<br />

and this contact is connected to the FSM!<br />

All car calls against the current direction of travel will be<br />

cleared when changing direction (e.g. when reaching a top or<br />

bottom limit). This parameter helps “educate” passengers to<br />

use the two button control correctly. Only activate when using<br />

a two button control!<br />

When approaching the target floor, landing calls in both<br />

directions (up and down) will be deleted. This parameter helps<br />

avoid unnecessary drives caused by “double calls” from one<br />

passenger when using a two button control. Only activate<br />

when using a two button control!<br />

Control modes for the Car ventilator (see “Car ventilator” on<br />

page 122).<br />

Run-on time of the car ventilator in <strong>Manual</strong>+Off-<br />

modes<br />

and Automatic+Off-Delay.<br />

Delay<br />

00 .. FF<br />

00 .. FF<br />

0 .. 63<br />

0 .. 63<br />

116 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Invert the ventilator output on the FSM. YES<br />

NO<br />

Automatic deactivation of the car light after each drive after the<br />

set time.<br />

Monitoring the car light with a current sensor on the FSM. If<br />

this parameter is activated, the operation of the car light is<br />

monitored and the system will be shut down CAR with<br />

FAILURE if the car light fails (see “CAR LIGHT<br />

LIGHT<br />

FAILURE” on page 179).<br />

Switched Off<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> ON/OFF<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>+Off-Delay<br />

Automatic+Off-Delay<br />

0 .. 250 sec<br />

0 .. 9999 sec<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Switch off the car light after an evacuation drive. YES<br />

NO<br />

Position indicator code issued on FPM X4.<br />

- HEX: Binary code<br />

- 1-of-N: Separate signal for each floor (only possible up to a<br />

maximum of eight floors)<br />

- GRAY: Gray code<br />

The initial value for the bottom floor can be set Bottom<br />

in<br />

Car (see “Bottom Flr. Car” on page 114).<br />

Flr.<br />

HEX<br />

1-of-N<br />

GRAY


Car panel module –<br />

Lamp type<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Display 0<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Display 1<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Display 2<br />

Car panel module –<br />

OPEN = A+B<br />

Car panel module –<br />

CLOSE = A+B<br />

Car panel module –<br />

OPEN = last<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Divider-Door<br />

Type of lamp for car call acknowledgement (important to avoid<br />

flickering).<br />

Function of pin X4.39 on the FPM car panel module. See<br />

“Display 0 .. 2” on page 122.<br />

Function of pin X4.38 on the FPM car panel module. See<br />

“Display 0 .. 2” on page 122.<br />

Function of pin X4.5 on the FPM car panel module. See<br />

“Display 0 .. 2” on page 122.<br />

The door open signal (FPM X4.35 / X4.36) is active for all car<br />

doors.<br />

The door close signal (FPM X4.2 / X4.3) is active for all car<br />

doors.<br />

The door open signal (FPM X4.35 / X4.36) is only active for<br />

the car door last opened.<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Card Reader<br />

Car panel module –<br />

-"- Clear Opt<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Chime–Roof<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Chime–Floor<br />

Car panel module –<br />

DoorOpen NC<br />

Car panel module –<br />

O-Load Flash<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Pin-34 Functn<br />

Car panel module –<br />

Xtra.Inputs<br />

Car panel module –<br />

3×Call=Clear<br />

Car panel module –<br />

HEX+n Offset<br />

Car door control for lifts with a too large footprint of the car.<br />

This parameter must only be activated if there is only one car<br />

door. If this parameter is activated, the FPM input “Open door<br />

B” (X4.35) is used to query the door divider contact (normally<br />

closed!). If the divider door is open, the input is deactivated<br />

and the car will be shut down on the current floor with<br />

“OVERLOAD”. The “OVERLOAD” state can be reset with<br />

input “Priority car” on the FPM (key switch on car panel,<br />

X4.37).<br />

Control of a card reader to enable car calls. Only activate after<br />

consulting NEW LIFT. This function requires a modification of<br />

the system specific wiring! If this parameter is activated, no car<br />

calls can be placed without a card reader!<br />

LED<br />

Filamt<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 117<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Delete pending car calls when activating the card reader. YES<br />

NO<br />

Separate approach chime for upward travel installed on the<br />

car roof. The chime signal is issued on FPM output „Display 1“<br />

(X4.38), if parameter Display 1=00000000 is set (see<br />

“Display 0 .. 2” on page 122).<br />

Separate approach chime for downward travel installed under<br />

the car floor. The chime signal is issued on FPM output<br />

„Display 2“ (X4.5), if parameter Display 2=00000000 is<br />

set (see “Display 0 .. 2” on page 122).<br />

Interpret the door open signal (FPM X4.35 / X4.36) as<br />

normally closed contact.<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Activate flashing mode of the overload display (FPM X4.6). YES<br />

NO<br />

Function of input X4.34 of the FPM (see “Pin-34 Functn” on<br />

page 123).<br />

Activate additional inputs for special functions on the car panel<br />

module.<br />

An already acknowledged car call can be deleted by placing<br />

the call another three times.<br />

0 .. 99<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Start value of the binary code for FPM position indicators. 0 .. 15


5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Fire Standards<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Fire–>Fireman (ADM)<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Fire–>Fireman (I/O)<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Off only in M-Flr<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Door Open in M-Flr<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Fire Main Floor<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Fire MainFlr Doors<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Smoke Evac. Plan<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Smoke alarm-Prio<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Fire sig. Pulsed<br />

Fireman Options<br />

DeadMan-DoorClose<br />

Fireman Options<br />

Fireman Mode Reset<br />

Weight sensor<br />

Sensor type<br />

Weight sensor<br />

OverLd-FSM Active<br />

Weight sensor<br />

FullLd-FSM Activ<br />

Weight sensor<br />

EmptyL-FSM Activ<br />

Fire standard the fireman mode complies to (see <strong>Manual</strong> for<br />

Fireman Mode).<br />

A fire signal issued through an ADM landing call module<br />

automatically activates the fireman mode after reaching the<br />

floor with the fire (see system description of fireman mode).<br />

A fire signal issued through a programmable input/output<br />

automatically activates the fireman mode after reaching the<br />

floor with the fire (see system description of fireman mode).<br />

The fireman mode can only be deactivated on the main floor<br />

(see system description of fireman mode).<br />

Default position of the car doors on the main floor in case of<br />

fire (see system description of fireman mode).<br />

Target floor of the evacuation drive in case of fire (see system<br />

description of fireman mode).<br />

Control of the car doors after reaching the fire main floor (see<br />

system description of fireman mode).<br />

The fire input is interpreted as a smoke detector signal (see<br />

system description of fireman mode).<br />

The target floor can be changed after the fireman drive has<br />

been started (by changing the smoke detector situation, see<br />

system description of fireman mode).<br />

The fire input is interpreted as a pulse and must be reset (see<br />

system description of fireman mode).<br />

Reset the fireman drive cycle completely. This should always<br />

be done after changing the fireman mode settings (see<br />

system description of fireman mode).<br />

Operating principle of the weight sensor.<br />

- ANALOGUE: An analogue weight sensor with a separate<br />

bus connection displays the load of the car as a percentage.<br />

The switching levels for empty, full and overload must be set<br />

in Level–Empty, Level–Full and Level–OverL.<br />

- DIGITAL: A digital weight sensor with separate outputs for<br />

empty, full and overload is connected to the respective<br />

terminals of the FSM car control module (see “Plug and<br />

terminal strip X5” on page 58). The switching levels are set<br />

directly on the weight sensor.<br />

Overload input on FSM X5.4<br />

Active LO: NO, normally open<br />

Active HI: NC, normally closed<br />

Full load input on FSM X5.3<br />

Active LO: NO, normally open<br />

Active HI: NC, normally closed<br />

Empty load input on FSM X5.2<br />

Active LO: NO, normally open<br />

Active HI: NC, normally closed<br />

TRA-266<br />

AS-1735 (Australia)<br />

Hong Kong<br />

SIA<br />

118 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 63<br />

All doors<br />

Door A only<br />

Door B only<br />

Door C only<br />

On Floor<br />

Above Floor<br />

Below Floor<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 20 sec<br />

�YES<br />

NO<br />

ANALOGUE<br />

DIGITAL<br />

Active: LO<br />

Active: HI<br />

Active: LO<br />

Active: HI<br />

Active: LO<br />

Active: HI


Weight sensor<br />

Level–Empty<br />

Weight sensor<br />

Level–Full<br />

Weight sensor<br />

Level–OverL<br />

Speech output<br />

Activated<br />

Speech output<br />

Output type<br />

Level for the empty state when using an analogue weight<br />

sensor.<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Speech output<br />

Speech codes<br />

Speech codes<br />

Project Config<br />

Basis<br />

Project Config<br />

LON Modules<br />

Hall Stations<br />

Landing Call Enable<br />

Hall Stations<br />

ADM-EAZ Coding<br />

Hall Stations<br />

Special display 0<br />

Hall Stations<br />

Special display 1<br />

000 .. 200 %<br />

Level for the full state when using an analogue weight sensor. 000 .. 200 %<br />

Level for the overload state when using an analogue weight<br />

sensor.<br />

Activates control of a speech processor using an additional<br />

SPK module (see “Speech output codes” on page 123).<br />

Coding of the SPK module’s output.<br />

- HEX: Binary code<br />

- 1-of-N: Separate signal for each output<br />

- GRAY: Gray code<br />

See “Speech output codes” on page 123.<br />

Allocation of the speech output code (see “Speech output<br />

codes” on page 123).<br />

Project specific parameters.<br />

Project specific parameters.<br />

Delay when re-enabling landing calls after special drives. This<br />

prevents immediate starting of the car, e.g. after switching off<br />

inspection control.<br />

Position indicator code issued on ADM X3.<br />

- HEX: Binary code<br />

- 1-of-N: Separate signal for each floor (only possible up to a<br />

maximum of five floors)<br />

- GRAY: Gray code<br />

The initial value for the bottom floor can be set Bottom<br />

in<br />

Hall (see “Bottom Flr. Hall” on page 114).<br />

Flr.<br />

Function of terminal 14 of the<br />

ADM-S landing call module (the function of terminal 14 must<br />

be set to “Soft-0” in the FST Editor).<br />

0: No function<br />

1: “Door open” display for revolving doors<br />

2: Fireman mode active<br />

3: Priority car or landing active<br />

4: Fireman mode or fire signal active<br />

5: Out-of-use display (only when the system is<br />

shut down)<br />

6: Priority car active<br />

000 .. 200 %<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 119<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

HEX<br />

1-of-N<br />

GRAY<br />

0 .. 255<br />

0 .. 30 sec<br />

HEX<br />

GRAY<br />

1-of-N<br />

0 .. 255<br />

No function at present 0 .. 255


5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> Off<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> Off Program<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> Off<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> Off floor<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> Off<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> Off doors<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> Off<br />

Pseudo-Flr. Park<br />

Special functions<br />

Loading function<br />

Program no.<br />

Special functions<br />

Loading function<br />

Loading time – Max<br />

Special functions<br />

Loading function<br />

Load-Sw.Disp<br />

Special functions<br />

Loading function<br />

LPrio-Prec.<br />

Special functions<br />

Remote Entry<br />

Special functions<br />

Bank control<br />

Special functions<br />

Ramp drive<br />

Inspection<br />

Door test<br />

Inspection<br />

I/P inverted<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

There can be more than one input for lift off.<br />

- FST X1.14<br />

- ADM X3<br />

- RIO module<br />

- GST (see GST <strong>Manual</strong>)<br />

After activating one of the inputs, the controller triggers a<br />

“hard” or “soft” lift off drive to the lift off floor. After completion<br />

of the drive, the car light is switched off and the system is shut<br />

down. The door open button on the car panel remains active!<br />

- HARD: All car and landing calls are deleted.<br />

- SOFT: Car calls remain, landing calls are deleted.<br />

HARD<br />

SOFT<br />

Target floor of the lift off drive. 0 .. 63<br />

The door set here will be opened and closed again after the lift<br />

off drive before the car light is switched off.<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> Off floor = pseudo floor 0 (see “Pseudo floors –” on<br />

page 129).<br />

Program number of the loading function (see “Loading<br />

function” on page 124).<br />

Maximum loading time. After this time has elapsed, the<br />

loading function stops and the car door closes.<br />

Set the function of the load display (see “Load-Sw.Disp” on<br />

page 125).<br />

All doors<br />

Door A only<br />

Door B only<br />

Door C only<br />

120 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0<br />

1<br />

0 .. 9999 sec<br />

0 .. 15<br />

Landing prio. setting has priority before loading function. YES<br />

NO<br />

Settings of the special function “Remote Entry” (see system<br />

description of „Remote Entry“).<br />

Settings of the special function “bank control” (see system<br />

description of bank control).<br />

Settings of the special function “ramp drive” (see system<br />

description of ramp drive).<br />

Enable door open/door close buttons (see “FPM: X4” on<br />

page 69) for moving the doors in dead man control. Door<br />

open/door close buttons can be installed on the car roof and<br />

wired parallel to the buttons of the car panel.<br />

Inverts the input “Inspection ON” on FSM X22.2 (normally<br />

closed).<br />

Blinking approach The indicator lights for car and landing calls flash when<br />

approaching the target floor.<br />

Car Call Priority Priority duration of the current direction of travel before<br />

changing direction. Important parameter for collective control:<br />

The minimum time must be set so that passengers calling the<br />

car with a landing call have ample time to enter the car and<br />

issue a command for the current direction of travel (at least 5<br />

.. 15 sec, depending on the size of the car). If the delay is too<br />

short, the car can be “snatched away” by a landing call in the<br />

opposite direction before a car call has been placed.<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 30 sec


Departure arrows Mode of departure arrow outputs ADM X3.8 and X3.9 on the<br />

landing call module:<br />

YES: Direction display with departure arrow<br />

NO: Direction display with direction arrow<br />

Only when door open: Direction display as departure arrow<br />

only when car door is open<br />

Depart.Arrows Max Maximum on-time of departure arrows when the car is not<br />

moving.<br />

DoorC=Emerg-EndSw. Door C input FST X14.6 on the pre-selection module is<br />

interpreted and stored as a top emergency end switch with<br />

hydraulic lifts, according to EN 81.<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Park drive programs The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> has a scheduler (calendar) that enables time- and<br />

day-dependent park drive programs. Each day of the week (SU – SA) can<br />

de divided in three time zones. Different park drive programs (park floor<br />

and waiting period) can be set for each of these time zones.<br />

Show LON modules After completing the “Search LON modules” function, the FST-2 provides<br />

a list with all LON modules connected to the LON bus.<br />

LON module [001\005]<br />

Prg:FSM00117 010\002<br />

ID:01 00 30 49 69 00<br />

[00] [00] [00] [00]<br />

ID:01 00 30 49 69 00<br />

[00] [00] [00] [00]<br />

[00] [00] [00] [00]<br />

[00] [00] [00] [00]<br />

The list is structured as follows:<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

only when door open<br />

0 .. 9999 sec<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 121<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

Day<br />

from<br />

to<br />

Prog<br />

Floor<br />

W-Time<br />

Code Description Setting range<br />

Day of the week SU .. SA<br />

Start time of the time zone 0:00 .. 23:45<br />

End time of the time zone 0:00 .. 23:45<br />

Program 1 .. 3 (for time zone 1 .. 3) 0 .. 2<br />

Floor: Parking floor 0 .. top floor<br />

Waiting period before starting the park drive. 0 .. 60 min<br />

A The first LON module of five connected modules is displayed.<br />

B Module type “FSM” with software version “00117”, appendix “010/<br />

002”.<br />

C LON-ID of the module: „010030496900“<br />

D First four configuration bytes of the module.<br />

Switch to configuration bytes 5 .. 12<br />

�/�<br />

Show next LON module<br />

�+�<br />

Back to previous LON module<br />

�+�<br />

Toggle line C of ADM modules<br />


5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

LON Module [004\005]<br />

Prg:ADR00112 010\002<br />

Floor=02 Door=A BS=0<br />

[00] [00] [00] [00]<br />

ADM bus masks The bus masks are two-digit hexadecimal values.<br />

Car ventilator<br />

A<br />

B Configuration bytes 1 .. 4 of the module<br />

C Configuration bytes 5 .. 8 of the module<br />

D Configuration bytes 9 .. 12 of the module<br />

A<br />

B<br />

C Landing call module on floor 02, door side A, bus cable 0<br />

D<br />

Fig. 5.11 Function of individual bits<br />

Setting Description<br />

Switched OFF The car ventilator is switched off.<br />

ON\OFF The car ventilator is switched on and off with a button<br />

<strong>Manual</strong><br />

on the car panel (input FPM X4.1).<br />

<strong>Manual</strong>+Off- The car ventilator is switched on with a button on the<br />

car panel (input FPM X4.1) and switched off after an<br />

Delay<br />

adjustable delay Vent. (see Off-Delay).<br />

Automatic+Off- The car ventilator is switched on automatically for<br />

each drive and switched off after an adjustable delay<br />

Delay<br />

Vent. (see Off-Delay).<br />

Display 0 .. 2 FPM outputs “Display 0 .. 2” can display specific operating states of the<br />

system. The states to be displayed are set to “1” in the respective control<br />

register according to the following diagram.<br />

If no operating states are selected in the control register (“00000000”), the<br />

122 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Fig. 5.12 Function of individual bits<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

outputs “Display 1” and “Display 2” can have the following functions:<br />

Display 1<br />

- Issue “Chime–Roof” signal, if Gong-Roof=YES is set (see “Chime–<br />

Roof” on page 117).<br />

- Load display for the “Loading function” (see “Speech output codes” on<br />

page 123).<br />

- <strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode buzzer (see “<strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode” on page 134).<br />

Display 2<br />

- Issue “Chime–Floor” signal if GongFloor=YES is set (see “Chime–<br />

Floor” on page 117).<br />

Pin-34 Functn The input “Loading button” (FPM X4.34) can have the following functions:<br />

Setting Function<br />

0 Loading button (see “Speech output codes” on page 123)<br />

1 Landing calls ON/OFF<br />

2 <strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode ON/OFF (see “<strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode” on page 135)<br />

3 V.I.P. mode 2 with “multiple call” ON/OFF<br />

4 V.I.P. mode 2 with “single call” ON/OFF<br />

5 Start button for fireman mode (Australia)<br />

6 Bank control OFF/ON<br />

Speech output codes The Speech code [1] provides the starting value for the position<br />

indicators. Position values are added to the starting value, coded as set in<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 123


5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

type and issued to the voice computer by the SPK module.<br />

Output<br />

The speech Speech code [2 .. 20] codes correspond to the<br />

controller states in the following table. The numerical value set for each<br />

speech code is coded as set Output type in and issued to the voice<br />

computer by the SPK module if the respective controller state occurs.<br />

Speech code <strong>Controller</strong> state<br />

code [1] Initial value for position indicators<br />

Speech<br />

code [2] Car starts moving<br />

Speech<br />

code [3] Door is opening<br />

Speech<br />

code [4] Door is closing<br />

Speech<br />

code [5] Door nudging<br />

Speech<br />

code [6] Priority car enabled<br />

Speech<br />

code [7] Priority car disabled<br />

Speech<br />

code [8] Priority landing enabled<br />

Speech<br />

code [9] Priority landing disabled<br />

Speech<br />

code [10] Priority (landing or car) enabled<br />

Speech<br />

code [11] Priority (landing or car) disabled<br />

Speech<br />

code [12] Fireman mode<br />

Speech<br />

code [13] Fire signal<br />

Speech<br />

code [14] Evacuation<br />

Speech<br />

code [15] Forced stop<br />

Speech<br />

code [16] Out-of-use<br />

Speech<br />

code [17] Overload<br />

Speech<br />

code [18] Full load<br />

Speech<br />

code [19] Direction of travel UP<br />

Speech<br />

code [20] Direction of travel DOWN<br />

Speech<br />

Loading function The loading function is activated with input “Loading button” (FPM X4.34),<br />

it is used for loading the car. The car door is kept open until<br />

- the door close button is pressed,<br />

- or the maximum loading time Load Time – Max. has elapsed.<br />

The loading function provides the following options:<br />

Loading program<br />

Two different loading programs can be selected in Program no..<br />

Setting Function<br />

0 – Loading button can be operated with the car door closed,<br />

the car door opens after pressing the button.<br />

– Pressing the loading button again terminates the loading<br />

function.<br />

124 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Maximum loading time<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

The maximum loading time in seconds can be set in Load Time-Max..<br />

Load-Sw.Disp<br />

FPM output “Display 1” (X4.38) as well as the position indicators EAZ-256,<br />

EAZ-LCD and EAZ-VFD can display the loading function:<br />

Lobby-Stop If the function “Lobby-Stop” is enabled, the car does not pass the<br />

selectable “Lobby” floor. The car always stops on that floor so employees<br />

in the lobby have the possibility to look in the car.<br />

This function provides the following options:<br />

Enable<br />

Setting Function<br />

– The loading button can only be operated if the car 1 door is<br />

open, the loading button does not work if the doors are<br />

closed.<br />

– Pressing the loading button again restarts the maximum<br />

loading time.<br />

– Placing a car call terminates the loading function.<br />

Setting Function<br />

Load-Sw.Disp deactivated<br />

0<br />

Loading display on FPM X4.38. The display starts flashing<br />

1<br />

20 seconds before the maximum loading time has elapsed<br />

(see “Display 0 .. 2” on page 122).<br />

Loading display on FPM X4.38. Illuminates during the last<br />

3<br />

20 seconds of the maximum loading time (see “Display 0<br />

.. 2” on page 122).<br />

If +8 is added to the set value, the position indicators EAZ-<br />

+8<br />

256, EAZ-LCD and EAZ-VFD will display the text “Loading<br />

activity”.<br />

The function „Lobby-Stop” is activated in Enable.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 125


5 Menu tree<br />

5.4 MAIN MENU – Config<br />

Floor<br />

The “Lobby” floor is set in Floor.<br />

Doors<br />

The car doors to be opened on the “Lobby” floor are set in Doors.<br />

V.I.P. mode The V.I.P. mode can be used the dedicate a car to VIPs. There are two<br />

V.I.P modes:<br />

- V.I.P. mode 1: Triggered by the LMS or a programmable input/output.<br />

Sets all call calls to “dead man mode”.<br />

- V.I.P. mode 2: Triggered by FPM input X4.34 (key switch in the car), has<br />

the functions described below.<br />

V.I.P. mode 2<br />

- Triggered by an impulse on FPM input X4.34 (key switch or card<br />

reader).<br />

- All pending landing calls are deleted and landing control is blocked.<br />

- Group operation: the lift is removed from the group and returns all<br />

pending landing calls to the group controller.<br />

- A car call must be placed within ten seconds of activation, otherwise the<br />

lift will return to normal mode.<br />

- All car calls already registered at the time of activation will be completed<br />

as usual.<br />

- In “multiple call” mode (see “Pin-34 Functn” on page 123), an unlimited<br />

number of car calls can be placed. This way, the V.I.P. mode can be<br />

extended as desired.<br />

- In “single call” mode (see “Pin-34 Functn” on page 123), only one car<br />

call can be placed. Further car calls can only be placed after reactivating<br />

FPM input X4.34.<br />

126 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning<br />

All menu items with adjustable values can be deactivated by entering the<br />

value “0”.<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Floor –<br />

Position ABS<br />

Floor –<br />

Position REL<br />

Floor –<br />

Position UP<br />

Floor –<br />

Position DOWN<br />

Floor –<br />

Zone Sw.UP<br />

Floor –<br />

Zone Sw.DOWN<br />

Landing –<br />

Landing UP<br />

Landing –<br />

Landing DOWN<br />

Global –<br />

Resolutn.<br />

Global –<br />

Direction<br />

Absolute levelling position of a floor. Do not change this value<br />

(see Installation & Commissioning).<br />

Levelling position of a floor relative to the bottom floor. This<br />

value is entered for each floor according to the system<br />

drawing or determined automatically during the learn drive<br />

(see Installation & Commissioning).<br />

Switch-on point for the internally generated levelling signal UP<br />

if the car is below the actual levelling position. This value<br />

corresponds to the braking distance of the crawling speed<br />

upwards and is determined automatically during the<br />

calibration drive (see Installation & Commissioning).<br />

Switch-on point for the internally generated levelling signal<br />

DOWN if the car is above the actual levelling position. This<br />

value corresponds to the braking distance of the crawling<br />

speed downwards and is determined automatically during the<br />

calibration drive (see Installation & Commissioning).<br />

Switch-on point for the internally generated door zone signal<br />

above the actual levelling position.<br />

Linear positioning: Set value to 200 mm!<br />

Incremental positioning: Do not change the value determined<br />

automatically during the learn drive! (See Installation &<br />

Commissioning.)<br />

Switch-on point for the internally generated door zone signal<br />

below the actual levelling position.<br />

Linear positioning: Set value to 200 mm!<br />

Incremental positioning: Do not change the value determined<br />

automatically during the learn drive! (See Installation &<br />

Commissioning.)<br />

Approach distance of the different drive speeds V1 .. V8 for<br />

upward travel. The values correspond to the braking distance<br />

for each speed when moving up. The values are determined<br />

automatically during the calibration drive. (See Installation &<br />

Commissioning.)<br />

Approach distance of the different drive speeds V1 .. V8 for<br />

downward travel. The values correspond to the braking<br />

distance for each speed when moving down. The values are<br />

determined automatically during the calibration drive. (See<br />

Installation & Commissioning.)<br />

Resolution of the absolute value encoder. This value<br />

determines how many bits are sent by the encoder for each<br />

millimetre of car movement. If this value is set incorrectly, the<br />

distances between floors are wrong and the car can run into<br />

the end switch at full speed during the calibration drive (see<br />

Installation & Commissioning).<br />

Direction of rotation of the absolute value encoder for upward<br />

travel.<br />

0 .. 9999999 mm<br />

-2500 .. 250000 mm<br />

0 .. 5000 mm<br />

0 .. 5000 mm<br />

0 .. 2500 mm<br />

0 .. 2500 mm<br />

0 .. 99999 mm<br />

0 .. 99999 mm<br />

0 .. 999.9999 bit/mm<br />

Left<br />

Right<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 127


5 Menu tree<br />

5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning<br />

Global –<br />

Encoder<br />

Global –<br />

Max. Floor<br />

Global –<br />

Crawl distance<br />

Global –<br />

Insp.FAST<br />

Global –<br />

Insp.UP<br />

Global –<br />

Insp.DOWN<br />

Global –<br />

ZoneB output<br />

Global –<br />

ZoneB Out.Inv.<br />

Global –<br />

Virt.Zone<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Relevel. limits –<br />

Limit UP ON<br />

Relevel. limits –<br />

Limit UP OFF<br />

Relevel. limits –<br />

Limit DN ON<br />

Relevel. limits –<br />

Limit DN OFF<br />

Relevel. limits –<br />

Limit LOW<br />

Type of shaft positioning:<br />

- Absolute: Linear positioning with absolute value encoder<br />

and tooth belt<br />

- Increm.: Incremental positioning with incremental encoder<br />

on motor or speed limiter<br />

Number of floors of the lift system, starting with zero<br />

(Example: 8 floors –> Setting = 7)<br />

Length of the desired crawling distance. The set value is<br />

added to the approach distance determined during the<br />

calibration drive for each speed (V1 .. V8).<br />

(Set value = 0 –> Direct approach)<br />

Measured deceleration distance of the fast inspection speed.<br />

The set value specifies the deceleration points for a fast<br />

inspection drive before the levelling position of the top and<br />

bottom landings. If this distance is set too short, the car can<br />

run into the end switch! This value should always be checked<br />

after a calibration drive and extended if necessary!<br />

Measured deceleration distance of the slow inspection speed<br />

when moving up. The set value specifies the switch-off point<br />

for an inspection drive before the levelling position of the top<br />

landing. If this distance is set too short, the car can run into the<br />

end switch! This value should always be checked after a<br />

calibration drive and extended if necessary!<br />

Measured deceleration distance of the slow inspection speed<br />

when moving down. The set value specifies the switch-off<br />

point for an inspection drive before the levelling position of the<br />

bottom landing. If this distance is set too short, the car can run<br />

into the end switch! This value should always be checked after<br />

a calibration drive and extended if necessary!<br />

- Output of the internally generated Encoder B signal (also<br />

see “FST-2: X13” on page 48). The output is 24V if the car<br />

is in the door zone.<br />

Inverts the output of the internally generated Encoder B signal<br />

(also see “FST-2: X13” on page 48).<br />

- YES: The output is 24V if the car is not in the door zone.<br />

- NO: The output is 24V if the car is in the door zone.<br />

Determines whether the values set in Positioning –<br />

Floor – Zone Sw.UP/DOWN are real or virtual zone<br />

signals. With linear positioning, this parameter should always<br />

be set to YES, with incremental positioning always to NO!<br />

Incorrect setting of this value can lead to problems with door<br />

control and levelling positions after the levelling adjustment!<br />

Relevelling upwards starts at the set distance between car<br />

and levelling position (see “Relevel. Limits” on page 133).<br />

Relevelling upwards stops at the set distance between car<br />

and levelling position (see “Relevel. Limits” on page 133).<br />

Relevelling downwards starts at the set distance between car<br />

and levelling position (see “Relevel. Limits” on page 133).<br />

Relevelling downwards stops at the set distance between car<br />

and levelling position (see “Relevel. Limits” on page 133).<br />

Increases the relevelling range if the car light is switched off.<br />

This function reduces the number of relevelling attempts<br />

during long standstill periods.<br />

Absolute<br />

Increm.<br />

0 .. 63<br />

-500 .. 500 mm<br />

0 .. 5000 mm<br />

-5000 .. 5000 mm<br />

-5000 .. 5000 mm<br />

128 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 2500 mm<br />

0 .. 2500 mm<br />

0 .. 2500 mm<br />

0 .. 2500 mm<br />

0 .. 5000 mm


Cal-Results –<br />

UP–Speed<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

UP–Accel.<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

UP–Decel.<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

UP–t_Accel.<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

UP–t_Decel.<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

DOWN–Speed<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

DOWN–Accel.<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

DOWN–Decel.<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

DOWN–t_Accel.<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

DOWN–t_Decel.<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

V80%–SpeedMon<br />

Cal-Results –<br />

V80%–Distance<br />

Pseudo floors –<br />

Pos. (Rel.)<br />

Upward speeds measured during the calibration drive for all<br />

drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Upward acceleration distances measured during the<br />

calibration drive for all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Upward deceleration distances measured during the<br />

calibration drive for all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Upward acceleration times measured during the calibration<br />

drive for all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Upward deceleration times measured during the calibration<br />

drive for all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Downward speeds measured during the calibration drive for<br />

all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

Control<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

Auto-Orien.<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

Orien. delay<br />

Downward acceleration distances measured during the<br />

calibration drive for all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Downward deceleration distances measured during the<br />

calibration drive for all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Downward acceleration times measured during the calibration<br />

drive for all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Downward deceleration times measured during the calibration<br />

drive for all drive speeds V1 .. VI.<br />

Speed monitoring point for deceleration monitoring when<br />

approaching the levelling position of the top or bottom landing.<br />

Speed monitoring point for deceleration monitoring when<br />

approaching the levelling position of the top or bottom landing.<br />

Additional stops without shaft doors. “Pseudo floors” are<br />

additional floors without call signals or doors. They can only be<br />

approached using the programmable inputs/outputs and are<br />

used for example as locking position for cable lifts without<br />

machine compartment or parking floor between regular floors<br />

(see “Function “special drive”” on page 166).<br />

Control register for incremental positioning:<br />

Default setting for this parameter:<br />

00001000<br />

Only change this setting after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

With incremental positioning, an orientation drive to the top or<br />

bottom landing is required after switching the controller on and<br />

off (also after a power failure). The orientation drive is started<br />

automatically after switching on the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>. Only<br />

change this parameter after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Delay of the orientation drive after switching on the FST-2-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong>.<br />

-10000 .. 10000 mm/s<br />

0 .. 50000 mm<br />

0 .. 50000 mm<br />

0 .. 32767 msec<br />

0 .. 32767 msec<br />

-1000 .. 10000 mm/s<br />

0 .. 50000 mm<br />

0 .. 50000 mm<br />

0 .. 32767 msec<br />

0 .. 32767 msec<br />

0 .. 10000 mm<br />

0 .. 49999 mm<br />

0 .. 49999 mm<br />

00000000 ..<br />

11111111<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 129<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 9999 ms


5 Menu tree<br />

5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

Corr.Bottom<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

Corr.Top<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

ZoneB–Length<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

ZoneB–Hysters<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

ZoneB–Level<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

ZoneB–Debnce<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

BO/BURunoff<br />

Increm. Positng. –<br />

KO/KU–Level<br />

Position of the bottom correction switch in [mm]. This is an<br />

absolute value. To determine the distance to the bottom floor,<br />

the absolute value of the bottom floor must be subtracted from<br />

the value entered here (see “Position ABS” on page 127). The<br />

value is determined automatically during the learn drive and<br />

must not be changed!<br />

Position of the top correction switch in [mm]. This is an<br />

absolute value. To determine the distance to the top floor, the<br />

value entered here must be subtracted from the absolute<br />

value of the top floor (see “Position ABS” on page 127). The<br />

value is determined automatically during the learn drive and<br />

must not be changed!<br />

Length of the zone signal when relevelling with the BO/BU<br />

(levelling top/levelling bottom) switch. This value is<br />

determined automatically during the learn drive.<br />

Length of the hysteresis of zone switch B. This value is<br />

determined automatically during the learn drive and is limited<br />

to 10 mm by the software. In case of levelling adjustment<br />

problems, the levelling for upward travel can be adjusted as<br />

described in the installation manual, and the levelling for<br />

downward travel can be adjusted by changing the hysteresis<br />

value.<br />

Level of zone switch B if the car is in the door zone.<br />

- LO: 0V (open)<br />

- HI: +24V (closed, default)<br />

Debounce time of zone switch B. Only change this value after<br />

consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Length of the BO/BU (levelling top/levelling bottom) signal<br />

when relevelling with the BO/BU switch. This value is<br />

determined automatically during the learn drive.<br />

Level of the KU/KO (correction bottom/correction top) switch if<br />

the car is at the top or bottom landing.<br />

- LO: 0V (open, default)<br />

- HI: +24V (closed)<br />

0 .. 9999999 mm<br />

0 .. 9999999 mm<br />

0 .. 250 mm<br />

-100 .. 100 mm<br />

Positioning parameters For a better understanding of the parameters for linear and incremental<br />

positioning, the main settings are shown graphically in the following two<br />

figures.<br />

130 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

LO<br />

HI<br />

0 .. 40 msec<br />

0 .. 250 mm<br />

LO<br />

HI


Fig. 5.13 Parameters for linear positioning<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 131


5 Menu tree<br />

5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning<br />

Fig. 5.14 Additional parameters for incremental positioning<br />

132 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Relevel. Limits Relevelling during unloading:<br />

- The car moves up during unloading.<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.5 MAIN MENU – Positioning<br />

- If the car is further from the levelling position than the Limit DN<br />

value<br />

ON, downward relevelling starts at relevelling speed Vn.<br />

- If the car is closer to the levelling position than the value Limit DN<br />

OFF, relevelling is switched off, the car decelerates and stops at the<br />

exact levelling position.<br />

- Parameter Limit DN ON can be set as desired. It controls<br />

switching on of the relevelling process. Parameter Limit DN OFF<br />

must be assigned according to the braking distance of the<br />

relevelling speed. It must be optimised until the car relevels<br />

exactly.<br />

- Parameter Limit DN ON must always be larger than parameter<br />

Limit DN OFF.<br />

This also applies to upward relevelling!<br />

Unloading<br />

Level<br />

Loading<br />

Fig. 5.15 Adjusting relevelling<br />

Limit DN ON<br />

Limit DN OFF<br />

Limit UP OFF<br />

Limit UP ON<br />

(Relevelling is switched on)<br />

(Relevelling is switched o ff)<br />

(Relevelling is switched o ff)<br />

(Relevelling is switched on )<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 133


5 Menu tree<br />

5.6 MAIN MENUE – Calls<br />

5.6 MAIN MENUE – Calls<br />

Landing calls –<br />

Config<br />

Landing calls –<br />

Program<br />

Landing calls –<br />

Door<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Landing call program for each floor:<br />

- No Button: No landing button available.<br />

- DOWN–collect: One button for downward calls available.<br />

- UP–collect: One button for upward calls available.<br />

- Two button: Buttons for upward and downward calls<br />

available.<br />

- STOP–collect: Upward and downward calls use the same<br />

button.<br />

Door program for each floor:<br />

- Single: Only one shaft door available.<br />

- Selective: Shaft doors are handled selectively.<br />

- Order: Mutually locked shaft doors are handled in the<br />

specified order.<br />

- Sequence: Mutually locked shaft doors are handled<br />

following the order the calls were placed.<br />

- Through: All shaft doors are handled simultaneously.<br />

Door program for each car door:<br />

- X: Door deactivated.<br />

- >AA< .. X<br />

Standard<br />

Non-collective<br />

Single call mode<br />

134 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Special call mode Pending calls can be processed in three different ways:<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.6 MAIN MENUE – Calls<br />

<strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode The <strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode requires a lift boy to be present at all times. The mode<br />

works as follows:<br />

- The <strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode can be activated permanently with <strong>Lift</strong>-<br />

parameter<br />

mode or temporarily with FPM input X4.34 (see “Pin-34 Functn”<br />

Boy<br />

on page 123).<br />

- Landing calls are acknowledged but not processed automatically.<br />

- Each acknowledged landing call will be confirmed on the car panel by<br />

flashing of the corresponding car call and a short sound of the buzzer<br />

(FPM output X4.38 “Display 2”).<br />

- The lift boy processes landing calls one after the other by following the<br />

flashing car calls.<br />

Settings:<br />

Setting Method<br />

Standard Landing and car calls are collected.<br />

- Only one call at a time is accepted.<br />

Non-collective<br />

- The car is reserved as long as it is moving or<br />

a door is open.<br />

- If the car is reserved, landing calls are<br />

blocked.<br />

call mode - Only one call at a time is accepted.<br />

Single<br />

- The car is reserved as long as it is moving or<br />

a door is open.<br />

- If the car is reserved, landing calls are<br />

collected but not processed.<br />

- When the car is released, the oldest call will<br />

be processed first.<br />

Pin-34 Functn - 2 = (see “Pin-34 Functn” on page 123) if <strong>Lift</strong>-Boy<br />

mode should only be activated temporarily with a key switch.<br />

<strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode - ON = to activate <strong>Lift</strong>-Boy mode permanently.<br />

Display 1 - 00000000 = (see “Display 0 .. 2” on page 122)<br />

Load-Sw.Disp - 00000000 = (see “Speech output codes” on<br />

page 123)<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 135


5 Menu tree<br />

5.7 MAIN MENUE – System<br />

5.7 MAIN MENUE – System<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Time-Date –<br />

Clock setting<br />

Time-Date –<br />

Date setting<br />

Time-Date –<br />

Daylight saving<br />

Password setting –<br />

Level 1 (high)<br />

Password setting –<br />

Level 2<br />

Password setting –<br />

Level 3 (low)<br />

Time of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>. Must be checked during each<br />

service and adjusted if necessary. If the time is not set<br />

correctly, the time stamps of the error storage are useless.<br />

Date of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>. Must be checked during each<br />

service and adjusted if necessary. If the date is not set<br />

correctly, the time stamps of the error storage are useless.<br />

14:34:12<br />

23:01:01<br />

Rule for automatic adjustment of daylight saving time. Off<br />

No automatic change<br />

European system<br />

USA system<br />

Password for commissioning security level:<br />

Unlimited access and editing rights. Must be checked during<br />

each service and adjusted if necessary. If the time is not set<br />

correctly, the time stamps of the error storage are useless.<br />

Password for servicing security level:<br />

Limited access and editing rights. See “MAIN MENU” on<br />

page 144.<br />

Password for maintenance security level:<br />

Limited access and no editing rights. See “MAIN MENU” on<br />

page 144.<br />

0000 .. 9999<br />

0000 .. 9999<br />

0000 .. 9999<br />

�<br />

Language Language of LC-Display and FST menus. German...<br />

English<br />

Recorder –<br />

Start recording. Depending on the event channel activated, YES<br />

Recorder RESTART certain internal events are recorded with date and time. If a<br />

PC-Card is inserted, the recording is stored on the card. Short<br />

recordings (a few minutes) can also be performed without a<br />

PC-Card (see “Event channels” on page 138).<br />

NO<br />

Recorder –<br />

Recorder STOP<br />

Recorder –<br />

Recorder CONTINUE<br />

Recorder –<br />

Filter setting<br />

Detail<br />

Recorder –<br />

Filter setting<br />

Statistics<br />

Recorder –<br />

Filter setting<br />

Group statistics<br />

Recorder –<br />

Filter setting<br />

Drive curve<br />

Recorder –<br />

Filter setting<br />

Remote activity<br />

Stop recording. � YES<br />

NO<br />

Continue stopped recording. � YES<br />

NO<br />

Enable event channel “detail” for recording. See “Event<br />

channels” on page 138.<br />

Enable event channel “statistics” for recording. See “Event<br />

channels” on page 138.<br />

Enable event channel “group statistics” for recording. See<br />

“Event channels” on page 138.<br />

Enable event channel “drive curve” for recording. See “Event<br />

channels” on page 138.<br />

Enable event channel “remote activity” for recording. See<br />

“Event channels” on page 138.<br />

136 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF


Recorder –<br />

Filter setting<br />

RIO traffic<br />

Recorder –<br />

Stop-when-full<br />

Enable event channel “RIO traffic” for recording. See “Event<br />

channels” on page 138.<br />

Determines if recordings stops when the PC-Card is full.<br />

Otherwise recording continues at the start of the card (endless<br />

loop).<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.7 MAIN MENUE – System<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 137<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

�<br />

�<br />

Update FST Update the FST software with a PC-Card. YES<br />

NO<br />

Update GST Update the GST software with a PC-Card. YES<br />

NO<br />

Update LON modules Update all connected LON modules if a new software version<br />

is available on the PC-Card.<br />

Config –> Backup Create a backup copy of the current FST-2 configuration for<br />

storage in an internal buffer.<br />

Config Card<br />

PC-Card tools –<br />

Config Card<br />

PC-Card tools –<br />

Clear card<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

Save current FST-2 configuration to the PC-Card. � YES<br />

NO<br />

Load the FST configuration from the PC-Card as current<br />

configuration. All parameters will be overwritten! Only activate<br />

this parameter after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

Save current FST-2 software to the PC-Card. � YES<br />

NO<br />

Delete everything on the PC-Card. � YES<br />

NO<br />

�<br />

Panel test Special function to test landing and car panels (see system<br />

description – Panel test).<br />

FST Reset! RESET the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong>. YES<br />

NO


5 Menu tree<br />

5.7 MAIN MENUE – System<br />

Event channels<br />

Fig. 5.16 Event channels of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

138 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


5.8 MAIN MENUE – Doors<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.8 MAIN MENUE – Doors<br />

All menu items with adjustable values can be deactivated by entering the<br />

value “0”.<br />

Menu item Description Setting<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Number doors<br />

Number of car doors. 0 .. 3<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Apply–ALL<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Cam delay<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Cam time Max<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Lock delay<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Lock fail Max<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Lock fail open<br />

Doors basic –<br />

SCCT debounce<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Retry time<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Open delay<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Bypass t–OFF<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Bypass t–ON<br />

Doors Basic –<br />

Pre-Opening<br />

The settings in Doors selective automatically apply to<br />

all car doors.<br />

Delay between reaching the levelling position or the zone area<br />

and dropping off of the lock-cam curve (retiring cam for<br />

unlocking the shaft doors, FSM X6.5).<br />

Maximum activation time of the retiring cam. Prevents the<br />

solenoid from damage in case of failures. After this time has<br />

elapsed, output FSM X6.5 for the retiring cam is switched off,<br />

independent from the state of the controller.<br />

Maximum delay between closing of the car door contact and<br />

the shaft door/locking contact when closing the doors. If this<br />

time is exceeded, the error DOOR LOCK TIMEOUT is<br />

displayed. The car door opens for the set Retry time and<br />

then closes again.<br />

Maximum number of consecutive lock fails (DOOR LOCK<br />

TIMEOUT). All landing and car calls will be deleted and the<br />

error DOOR LOCK RETRY CNT is displayed if this number<br />

is exceeded.<br />

Door allocation after lock fail:<br />

One: Only the car door last opened opens after a lock fail<br />

LOCK TIMEOUT).<br />

(DOOR<br />

All: All car doors open after a lock (DOOR LOCK<br />

fail<br />

TIMEOUT).<br />

Delay between closing of the safety circuit and activation of<br />

the drive contactors when starting (prevents contactor<br />

bouncing).<br />

Opening time of the car door before closing again after a lock<br />

fail (DOOR LOCK TIMEOUT).<br />

Delay before opening the doors after the levelling position has<br />

been reached (see “Door times diagram” on page 143).<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 139<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 4 sec<br />

0010 .. 9999 sec<br />

0 .. 4 sec<br />

0 .. 10<br />

ONE<br />

ALL<br />

0 .. 2.5 sec<br />

0 .. 4 sec<br />

0 .. 4 sec<br />

Delay when switching off the safety circuit bypass relay K20. 0 .. 2 sec<br />

Delay when switching on the safety circuit bypass relay K20. 0.1 .. 2 sec<br />

Enable approaching with car and shaft doors open. This<br />

parameter can only be activated when using the A6 Safety<br />

Circuit! The following steps are required to deactivate an<br />

integrated A6 Safety Circuit:<br />

- Set Pre-Opening = NO<br />

- Set Relevelling = NO<br />

- Disconnect power supply of the safety circuit (terminal 518/<br />

519)<br />

YES<br />

NO


5 Menu tree<br />

5.8 MAIN MENUE – Doors<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Fast-Closure<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Close to drive<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Remains-open<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Nudging output<br />

Doors basic –<br />

PhotocellLevel<br />

Doors basic –<br />

DRM-Door<br />

Doors basic –<br />

SS-Curtain<br />

Menu item Description Setting<br />

Doors basic –<br />

SS-CurtainWait<br />

Doors basic –<br />

WheelchairTime<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Selective Cams<br />

Doors basic –<br />

Door-Lock Type<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Type<br />

After an interruption of the photocell, the minimum wait time is<br />

reduced so that the delay for closing the car door is shorter<br />

than without a photocell interruption.<br />

If priority car is activated, the car door does not close before<br />

the door close button on the car panel is pressed. This<br />

function prevents drives by unauthorised passengers if the<br />

priority key switch is activated. The door close signal can be<br />

simulated in the machine compartment by pressing the �<br />

key.<br />

If the car doors are open, they will remain open until a new call<br />

is placed. This parameter does not affect the default position<br />

of the doors (see “>A< .. X” on page 134). Only activate this<br />

parameter after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

FSM X6.6 (cam B) and FSM X6.7 (cam C) are used as<br />

nudging outputs for doors A and B. If the car door is open and<br />

the photocell is interrupted longer than the time set Doors in<br />

– Door nudging, the door will be closed<br />

selective<br />

with the nudging output activated.<br />

Active level of photocell inputs FSM X8.8 / X9.8 and reversing<br />

contact inputs FSM X8.8 / X9.6.<br />

- HI: Normally open (photocell interrupted: 24V on input,<br />

photocell clear: 0V on input; this also applies to the reversing<br />

contact)<br />

- LO: Normally closed (photocell interrupted: 0V on input,<br />

photocell clear: 24V on input; this also applies to the<br />

reversing contact)<br />

Generate runtime monitoring DRM-DOOR FAILURE<br />

(system shutdown) after the number of consecutive door<br />

failures set here (possible settings: 0 .. 7). If +8 is added to the<br />

set value, a single photocell failure will also generate runtime<br />

monitoring. Prevents burning out of unregulated door drives<br />

(see “DRM-DOOR FAILURE” on page 177).<br />

Control of a self-regulating safety curtain (light barrier) to<br />

replace the car doors. The self-regulation uses the FSM door<br />

relays and the safety circuit monitoring function of the<br />

controller (see System description – SS-Curtain).<br />

Duration of the safety curtain test impulse issued by the door<br />

relay of the FSM before each drive.<br />

Extended opening time of the car door after a disabled call on<br />

the landing panel.<br />

Is there a separate retiring cam for each door side that must<br />

be controlled separately (selectively)?<br />

- YES: Each door side has a separate retiring cam with<br />

selective control via FSM X8.<br />

- NO: The retiring cams of all door sides are controlled parallel<br />

via FSM X8.<br />

Control method of the retiring cam for automatic car doors and<br />

manual shaft doors (see “Cam versions” on page 142).<br />

Car door type: All common car doors are supported. No<br />

function allocated to this parameter at present.<br />

140 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

HI<br />

LO<br />

0 .. 15<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 10 sec<br />

0 .. 255 sec<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0<br />

1


Doors selective –<br />

Opening time<br />

Opening time of a car door without limit switch. If car doors<br />

without limit switches are used, the inputs for the door limit<br />

switches must be bridged (see “FSM: X7” on page 58 and<br />

“FSM: X9” on page 59). The opening time of car doors without<br />

limit switches must be measured exactly and entered here.<br />

The value should be set to 20 seconds for doors with limit<br />

switches (see “Door times diagram” on page 143).<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.8 MAIN MENUE – Doors<br />

Menu item Description Setting<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Decoupling<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Decouple Max<br />

Doors selective –<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> door<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Man. door deb.<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Nudging<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Limit switches<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Photocell<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Photocell Xtn<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Open hold time<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Reversing time<br />

Car doors that allow the door leaf to be decoupled. If this<br />

parameter is activated, the controller checks the door limit<br />

switches and the safety circuit and recognizes if the door<br />

leaves are decoupled. It then tries re-coupling the door leaves<br />

by repeatedly opening the doors. This parameter can only be<br />

activated with working door limit switches.<br />

Maximum re-coupling attempts when the door leaves are<br />

decoupled before all calls are deleted (only relevant if<br />

Decoupling = YES).<br />

Shaft doors are manual revolving doors. Door C input of the<br />

safety circuit is used to query the manual door contact<br />

(display: MANUAL DOOR OPEN).<br />

Debounce time of the manual door contacts. This parameter<br />

prevents “scatter” at the retiring cam output when starting due<br />

to bouncing manual door contacts.<br />

If no nudging outputs are used to decrease the closing speed<br />

of the doors during nudging (Nudging output = NO),<br />

pulsed nudging can be triggered. The door close call is issued<br />

as a pulse so the door closes in steps. The Cycle time of the<br />

nudging pulses can be set here. If the photocell is interrupted<br />

longer than the time set in Doors selective – Door<br />

nudging, the door will be closed with pulsed nudging.<br />

The car door has limit switches (end switches).<br />

- YES: Connect car door limit switches to FSM X6 and X10.<br />

Set Opening time to 20 seconds.<br />

- NO: The limit switch inputs FSM X6 and X10 are not<br />

required, opening time = time actually required for opening<br />

the car door.<br />

See “FSM: X6” on page 58, “FSM: X10” on page 59 and “Door<br />

times diagram” on page 143.<br />

Pay attention to jumpers J21, J31, J71 and J81 on the FSM<br />

(see FSM “J21” on page 55).<br />

Maximum number of consecutive reversing cycles of the car<br />

door caused by photocell interruptions before forced closing<br />

(nudging). This parameter is normally set to 0 (function<br />

disabled). Only set this parameter to a value higher than 0<br />

after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

Internal extension of the photocell signal by the controller<br />

software. This parameter enables complete opening of the<br />

door after a photocell interruption.<br />

The time doors are held open if there are no car or landing<br />

calls. This parameter is only effective if no further calls are<br />

pending. The door opening time with pending calls is<br />

controlled Min. Wait Landing / Min. Wait<br />

by<br />

(see “Door times diagram” on page 143).<br />

Car<br />

0 .. 20 sec<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 141<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 10<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 5 sec<br />

0 .. 6 sec<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0 .. 10<br />

0.0 .. 10.0 sec<br />

2 .. 250 sec<br />

Opening time of the car door after a reversing cycle. 0.0 .. 20.0 sec


5 Menu tree<br />

5.8 MAIN MENUE – Doors<br />

Menu item Description Setting<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Deenergize<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Change delay<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Door nudging<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Min. Wait Landing<br />

Doors selective –<br />

Min. Wait Car<br />

Cam versions<br />

The car door is not powered when in the limit position OPEN<br />

(no UP signal).<br />

Delay when switching the door relay (from door open to door<br />

close and vice versa). This parameter prevents short circuits<br />

caused by too fast switching of doors using three-phase<br />

current.<br />

Time before nudging (forced closure) starts if the photocell is<br />

interrupted permanently. Nudging will ignore the signal from<br />

the photocell. There are two methods for nudging:<br />

- Nudging output activated (closing speed reduced by the<br />

door controller) if<br />

Nudging output = YES.<br />

- Pulsed if Nudging output = NO and the pulse<br />

duration is set in Nudging.<br />

Minimum wait time of the car at a floor after processing a<br />

landing call (see “Door times diagram” on page 143).<br />

Minimum wait time of the car at a floor after processing a car<br />

call (see “Door times diagram” on page 143).<br />

Setting Control method<br />

142 FST-2_HB.EN12/05<br />

YES<br />

NO<br />

0.1 .. 2.0 sec<br />

0 .. 300 sec<br />

0 .. 60 sec<br />

0 .. 60 sec<br />

Standard method:<br />

0<br />

- When approaching a floor, the retiring cam releases<br />

immediately after the levelling position has been reached<br />

and the cam delay has elapsed. The manual shaft door can<br />

be opened while the car door is still opening.<br />

- The retiring cam does not re-activate before the car door is<br />

closed completely. The manual shaft door can be opened<br />

while the car door is closing so that the car door reverses.<br />

Method “Austria”<br />

1<br />

- When approaching a floor, the retiring cam does not release<br />

before the car door has opened completely. The manual<br />

shaft door cannot be opened while the car door is still<br />

opening.<br />

- The retiring cam re-activates as soon as the car door starts<br />

closing. The manual shaft door cannot be opened while the<br />

car door is closing.


Door times diagram<br />

Cam<br />

Delay<br />

Fig. 5.17 Door times of the FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong><br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.8 MAIN MENUE – Doors<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 143


5 Menu tree<br />

5.9 MAIN MENU<br />

5.9 MAIN MENU<br />

�<br />

Menu item Description Setting<br />

Block MENU Close main menu:<br />

YES<br />

Access to the menu is only granted with the password for the<br />

required security level.<br />

NO<br />

Example: If a password is set to enable access to a part of the menu for e.g.<br />

maintenance work, a password must be set for the other security levels as<br />

well. Example:<br />

Level 1: 1234<br />

Level 2: 2222<br />

Level 3: 0000<br />

In this case, all parameters of the maintenance level can be accessed. The<br />

parameters of the servicing level are protected with the password 2222.<br />

Unlimited access is granted when entering the password 1234.<br />

144 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


5.10 TEST MENU<br />

5 Menu tree<br />

5.10 TEST MENU<br />

�<br />

DRM-<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Fault reset Reset runtime failures that caused the system to stop. All error YES<br />

messages starting with shut down the system (error<br />

LED illuminates). The shutdown can be reset with “Fault<br />

reset”.<br />

NO<br />

Doors Lock or unlock car doors (during maintenance work). Locked<br />

car doors are marked with an X after the door letter in line C<br />

of the FST display (see “Status messages in line C” on<br />

page 13). The door lock remains when switching the controller<br />

off and on again.<br />

Test drive Place calls using the FST keypad. If test drive is activated, line<br />

C of the FST display shows<br />

Target = ... Select the target floor using keys �/�.<br />

Execute the command by pressing �.<br />

Auto test drive Trigger automatic generation of car calls MAIN MENU<br />

(see<br />

Config – Auto test drive page 112). If<br />

–<br />

automatic test drive is activated, line C of the FST display<br />

shows T.<br />

Service mode In service mode, external error messages are suppressed<br />

(e.g. collective error messages). In service mode, line B of the<br />

FST display SERVICE shows ACTIVE.<br />

End switch test top Slow travel to the top emergency end switch.<br />

This test cannot be started from the top floor!<br />

After starting the test with YES, � button must be pressed<br />

until reaching the end switch (dead man control).<br />

End switch test bot. Slow travel to the bottom emergency end switch.<br />

This test cannot be started from the bottom floor!<br />

After starting the test with YES, button � must be pressed<br />

until reaching the end switch (dead man control).<br />

V-Mon. test top Test speed monitoring at the top.<br />

This test can only be performed if end switch speed monitoring<br />

is activated!<br />

This test cannot be started from the top floor!<br />

After starting the test with YES, button � must be pressed<br />

until the end switch speed monitoring function triggers (dead<br />

man control).<br />

V-Mon. test bot. Test speed monitoring at the bottom.<br />

This test can only be performed if end switch speed monitoring<br />

is activated!<br />

This test cannot be started from the bottom floor!<br />

After starting the test with YES, button � must be pressed<br />

until the end switch speed monitoring function triggers (dead<br />

man control).<br />

Lock �<br />

Unlock<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 145<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

ON<br />

OFF<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

DRM test Test runtime monitoring. � YES<br />

NO


5 Menu tree<br />

5.10 TEST MENU<br />

Menu item Description Setting range<br />

Buffer test Up Runs into the counterweight buffer at nominal speed.<br />

This test can cause damage to the car. Only perform this test<br />

after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

This test cannot be started from the top floor!<br />

After starting the test with YES, button � must be pressed<br />

until reaching the buffer (dead man control).<br />

Buffer test Down Runs into the car buffer at nominal speed.<br />

This test can cause damage to the car. Only perform this test<br />

after consulting NEW LIFT!<br />

This test cannot be started from the bottom floor!<br />

After starting the test with YES, button � must be pressed<br />

until reaching the buffer (dead man control).<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

YES �<br />

NO<br />

146 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

General<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> has 80 programmable inputs/outputs. Eight inputs/<br />

outputs are located directly on the FST-2- main circuit board (X1.4 .. X1.11)<br />

and seven more are located on the Car Control Module FSM X24 (see<br />

“Plug and terminal strip X24” on page 62). Those I/O’s are available with all<br />

systems.<br />

Other 72 inputs/outputs are located anywhere on the LON bus on so called<br />

“Remote I/O Modules” (see “RIO-ADM remote I/O module” on page 84 and<br />

“RIO-FPM remote I/O module” on page 87).<br />

Characteristics of a programmable input/output:<br />

- Assigned function<br />

- Signal direction (input or output)<br />

- Active state (+24V or GND)<br />

Each input/output can be allocated a function on-site using the FST menu.<br />

The signal direction of the inputs/outputs is divided into input and output<br />

functions.<br />

The active state of the function can be defined as +24V or GND.<br />

Input functions The input function is triggered if the state on the input/output changes from<br />

inactive to active.<br />

Output functions As soon as the condition for the output function is met, the state on the<br />

input/output changes from inactive to active.<br />

Flags The “Flag” function is a special function. A flag allows different controller<br />

states to be linked with “OR”. The input/output is activated if at least one of<br />

the required conditions is met.<br />

Signals The function “signals” can link and issue controller states similar to the flag<br />

function. It links door and car states with “AND”. The input/output is<br />

activated if all of the required conditions are met.<br />

Blocking floors Car and landing calls for any floor can be blocked and enabled using<br />

programmable inputs. Each input can be assigned a combination of<br />

landing and car calls.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 147


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Programming<br />

User defined<br />

error messages<br />

Setting the RAW register<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> enables the output of arbitrary error and event<br />

messages This means that any error message provided by the FST<br />

software can be assigned a programmable input/output. This enables<br />

forwarding of user defined error states to the outside world.<br />

Programming of the inputs and outputs is done in the FST menu under<br />

MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O Configuration. The<br />

following submenus are available:<br />

Submenu Description<br />

ports The programmed function is assigned to the input/<br />

I\O<br />

output with RAW the register. Port [0] Ports ..<br />

[79] are programmable<br />

Port<br />

flags Programming of up to 8 flags that represent an “OR”<br />

I\O<br />

link of different controller functions.<br />

error Select up to three error messages from the error list.<br />

I\O<br />

The selected error messages are stored USER as<br />

[0] .. USER ERROR [2].<br />

ERROR<br />

The RAW register is an eight digit hexadecimal value coding a 32-bit<br />

register. With the RAW register, a function from the function table<br />

(page 151) can be assigned to the respective terminal. Furthermore, active<br />

state, signal direction and function parameters are set in the RAW register.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

148 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Programmable<br />

inputs/outputs<br />

Input/output Terminal<br />

[0] FST: X1.4<br />

RAW<br />

[1] FST: X1.5<br />

RAW<br />

[2] FST: X1.6<br />

RAW<br />

[3] FST: X1.7<br />

RAW<br />

[4] FST: X1.8<br />

RAW<br />

[5] FST: X1.9<br />

RAW<br />

[6] FST: X1.10<br />

RAW<br />

[7] FST: X1.11<br />

RAW<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

[8] .. [71] Inputs/outputs of external RIO modules anywhere on<br />

RAW<br />

the LON bus (see “RIO-ADM remote I/O module” on<br />

page 84 and “RIO-FPM remote I/O module” on<br />

page 87).<br />

[72] FSM X24.2<br />

RAW<br />

[73] FSM X24.3<br />

RAW<br />

[74] FSM X24.4<br />

RAW<br />

[75] FSM X24.5<br />

RAW<br />

[76] FSM X24.6<br />

RAW<br />

[77] FSM X24.7<br />

RAW<br />

[78] FSM X24.8<br />

RAW<br />

RAW [79] not available<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 149


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Fig. 6.1 Hexadecimal coding of the 32-bit register<br />

Fig. 6.2 Function of individual bits<br />

Active level<br />

Input/output<br />

Bit 0 Description<br />

1 +24V (only possible with inputs)<br />

0 GND<br />

digit 1:<br />

digit 2:<br />

digit 3:<br />

digit 4:<br />

digit 5:<br />

digit 6:<br />

digit 7:<br />

digit 8:<br />

Bit 0-3<br />

Bit 4-7<br />

Bit 8-11<br />

Bit 12-15<br />

Bit 16-19<br />

Bit 20-23<br />

Bit 24-27<br />

Bit 28-31<br />

Active Level of<br />

I/O-Port<br />

Input (1=active)<br />

Output (1=active)<br />

Function Number<br />

Function Parameter<br />

The active level of an output must always be GND, as the open<br />

collector output can only switch the required currents in this state.<br />

Bit 1 & 2 Description<br />

00 no function<br />

01 Input<br />

10 Output<br />

11 Input/output<br />

150 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function table The following table contains all functions including function numbers that<br />

can be allocated to a RAW register. The column “Param.” shows whether<br />

the respective function has function parameters or not. Possible function<br />

parameters are described separately (page reference).<br />

Below the function table, examples for functions without parameters are<br />

listed.<br />

Bit 3 – 7 Input/output Description Param.<br />

00000 (0) - no function no<br />

00001 (1) Input/output Landing call (see page 153) yes<br />

00010 (2) Input Fire signal (see page 154) yes<br />

00011 (3) Input <strong>Lift</strong> Off no<br />

00100 (4) Input Priority landing (see page 155) yes<br />

00101 (5) Input Drive inhibit no<br />

00110 (6) Output Position indicator yes<br />

00111 (7)<br />

..<br />

01100 (12)<br />

Currently not assigned<br />

01101 (13) Input Overload no<br />

01110 (14) Input Full load no<br />

01111 (15) Output Flag (see page 157) yes<br />

10000 (16) Output Signal (see page 162) yes<br />

10001 (17) Input Landing control OFF no<br />

10010 (18) Input Service no<br />

10011 (19) Input Evacuation (see page 164) yes<br />

10100 (20) Input Forced stop no<br />

10101 (21) Input Special drive (see page 166) yes<br />

10110 (22) Output Alarm misuse (see page 167) yes<br />

10111 (23) Output Speed threshold (see page 168) yes<br />

11000(24)<br />

..<br />

11001 (25)<br />

- Currently not assigned<br />

11010 (26) Input Ramp drive (see page 169). yes<br />

11011 (27) Input Emergency end switch no<br />

11100 (28) Input Activate VIP mode no<br />

11101 (29) Input Override floor blocking (see<br />

page 170)<br />

yes<br />

11110 (30) Input Special (internal special<br />

functions)<br />

yes<br />

11111 (31) Input Block floor (see page 171) yes<br />

Examples The following table shows the RAW register values for all functions without<br />

function parameters. Examples for functions with function parameters can<br />

be found in the description of each function on the following pages.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 151


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function Input/output RAW register<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> 0000001A<br />

Off Input<br />

0000006A<br />

00000072<br />

0000008A<br />

00000092<br />

000000A2<br />

000000B4<br />

0000002A<br />

Overload Input<br />

Full load Input<br />

Landing control OFF Input<br />

Service Input<br />

Forced stop Input<br />

Alarm misuse Output<br />

Drive inhibit Input<br />

152 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Function “landing call”<br />

Fig. 6.3 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

The function “landing call” enables placing a landing call using the terminal<br />

of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Floor 0, door side A, direction UP, bus 0 0001000A<br />

Floor 1, door side A, direction DOWN, bus 0 0000010A<br />

Floor 2, door side A, direction UP, bus 0 0001020A<br />

Floor 5, door side B, direction DOWN, bus 1 0005450A<br />

Floor 15, door side A, direction STOP, bus 2 000A0F0A<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 153


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function “fire signal”<br />

Fig. 6.4 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

The function “fire signal” enables triggering a fire evacuation drive using the<br />

terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Floor 0, smoke alarm NO 00000012<br />

Floor 1, smoke alarm YES 00010112<br />

Floor 5, smoke alarm NO 00000512<br />

Floor 15, smoke alarm YES 00010F12<br />

Floor 20, smoke alarm NO 00001412<br />

154 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Function “priority landing”<br />

Fig. 6.5 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

The function “priority landing” enables triggering a priority landing drive<br />

using the terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Floor 0, door side A 00000022<br />

Floor 1, door side B 00004122<br />

Floor 5, door side C 00008522<br />

Floor 15, door side A 00000F22<br />

Floor 22, door side B 00005622<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 155


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function “position indicator”<br />

Fig. 6.6 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

The function “position indicator” enables the output of one bit of the coded<br />

position indicator signal to the terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

fixed pattern for<br />

position indicator<br />

position indicator bit<br />

interface code<br />

binary<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Position indicator bit 0, HEX 00000034<br />

code<br />

Position indicator bit 0, GRAY 00000834<br />

code<br />

Position indicator bit 4, HEX 00000434<br />

code<br />

Position indicator bit 4, GRAY 00000C34<br />

code<br />

156 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Function “flag”<br />

Fig. 6.7 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

The function “flag” enables activation of the terminal of a programmable<br />

input/output in specified conditions. The condition is an “OR” link from<br />

different controller states. A control parameter allows the condition to be<br />

issued debounced or delayed.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Flag 0000007C<br />

0<br />

Flag 0000017C<br />

1<br />

Flag 0000027C<br />

2<br />

Flag 0000037C<br />

3<br />

Flag 0000047C<br />

4<br />

Flag 0000057C<br />

5<br />

Flag 0000067C<br />

6<br />

Flag 0000077C<br />

7<br />

Setting flags Eight flags are available in the FST menu. They correspond to an “OR” link<br />

of any of the controller states in the table below.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

- I\O Flags - Mask and select the Flag [0 ..<br />

Configuration<br />

to be parametrised (�+�).<br />

7]<br />

The Mask parameter is an eight digit hexadecimal value coding a 32-bit<br />

register.<br />

The Mask parameter value is the sum of the selected flag functions. The<br />

hexadecimal values from the table are added digit by digit to define the flag<br />

parameter.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 157


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

To enable the parametrised flag, bit 0 must be set to “1” in parameter MAIN<br />

- Configuration - I\O Configuration - I\O Flags<br />

MENU<br />

Ctrl, see “Setting flag control” on page 159!<br />

-<br />

Flag function Description Value<br />

(hexadecimal)<br />

Normal operation 00000001<br />

<strong>Controller</strong> stopped Shutdown through FST menu 00000002<br />

Emergency stop 00000004<br />

Inspection mode 00000008<br />

Auxiliary control 00000010<br />

Runtime monitoring Motor monitoring has triggered<br />

and shut down the FST-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong>.<br />

00000020<br />

Fire signal 00000040<br />

Fireman mode 00000080<br />

Overload 00000100<br />

Full load 00000200<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> OFF 00000400<br />

Priority car 00000800<br />

Priority landing 00001000<br />

Landing control OFF 00002000<br />

Calibration / learn Calibration or learn drive is<br />

00004000<br />

drive<br />

running.<br />

Evacuation 00008000<br />

not assigned 00010000<br />

not assigned 00020000<br />

not assigned 00040000<br />

Data transmission A data file is transmitted. 00080000<br />

Maintenance required A service counter (motor hours,<br />

drives, door cycles) has reached<br />

its limit.<br />

00100000<br />

Power supply too low The supply voltage is below the<br />

minimum (+17V).<br />

Homing Park drive to the lowest floor<br />

(hydraulic lifts).<br />

Park drive Park drive according to the set<br />

program parameters.<br />

Service The lift system is serviced,<br />

function of the error storage is<br />

suppressed.<br />

00200000<br />

00400000<br />

00800000<br />

01000000<br />

Self test The FST performs a self test. 02000000<br />

End switch test A test drive to the top and bottom<br />

end limits is running.<br />

04000000<br />

User error 0 The user defined error no. 1 has<br />

occurred (See “User error” on<br />

page 161.).<br />

08000000<br />

158 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Examples<br />

Setting delay /<br />

debounce value<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Flag function Description Value<br />

(hexadecimal)<br />

User error 1 The user defined error no. 2 has<br />

occurred (See “User error” on<br />

page 161.).<br />

10000000<br />

User error 2 The user defined error no. 3 has<br />

occurred (See “User error” on<br />

page 161.).<br />

20000000<br />

Send fax report A fax report is sent. 40000000<br />

NEW LIFT internal 80000000<br />

Flag functions MASK<br />

“Emergency stop” OR 00000024<br />

“Runtime monitoring”<br />

“Inspection” OR 00000018<br />

“Auxiliary control”<br />

“Fire signal” OR “Fireman mode” OR “<strong>Lift</strong> OFF” OR 00001CC0<br />

“<br />

Priority car” OR “Priority landing”<br />

00100000<br />

“Maintenance required”<br />

“Homing” OR 00C00000<br />

“Park drive”<br />

Output of the controller states set for a flag can be delayed or debounced.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

- I\O Flags - Delay and select the Flag [0 ..<br />

Configuration<br />

to be parametrised (�+�).<br />

7]<br />

Set seconds or switching operations according to the debounce type set<br />

with bit 1 in MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O Configuration<br />

- I\O Flags - Ctrl.<br />

Setting flag control The respective flag can be blocked or enabled with the flag control register.<br />

This parameter also determines whether flag output is delayed or<br />

debounced.<br />

Select menu MENU - Configuration - I\O Configuration<br />

item<br />

I\O Flags - Ctrl and select the Flag [0 .. 7] to be<br />

-<br />

parametrised (�+�).<br />

Flag control is a two digit hexadecimal value coding an 8-bit register.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 159


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Examples<br />

Fig. 6.8 Hexadecimal coding of the 8-bit register<br />

Fig. 6.9 Function of individual bits<br />

enable (0=blocked<br />

1=enabled)<br />

debounce (0=debounce<br />

1=delay)<br />

not used<br />

stop PC-Card recording<br />

Function DELAY CTRL<br />

Flag enabled, output with triple 03 01<br />

debounce<br />

Flag blocked, output with 10 second 10 02<br />

delay<br />

Flag enabled, output with 20 second 20 03<br />

delay<br />

Flag blocked, output with single 01 00<br />

debounce<br />

160 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


User error<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

The function “user error” enables the output of an error message from the<br />

error list on the terminal of a programmable input/output. If the selected<br />

error message occurs, the second line of the FST display shows USER<br />

[0..2]. The flag function “user error” allows output of the state<br />

ERROR<br />

on a terminal.<br />

Three user errors (ERROR [0] .. ERROR [2]) are available in MAIN<br />

MENU - Configuration - I\O Configuration - I\O Error.<br />

Setting ID Select the user error I\O Error [0 .. 2] to be parametrised with key<br />

combination �+� and select an error message from the error list in ID:.<br />

Setting Ctrl Select the value 01 in Ctrl: to enable user errors.<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 161


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function “signal”<br />

The function “signal” enables the output of an “AND” link of various<br />

controller internal signals on the terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

Examples Function RAW register<br />

“Floor 5” AND “Level” AND “Door A open” 00244584<br />

“Door A closed” AND “Door B closed” 00018084<br />

“Car call pressed (pulse)” 02000084<br />

“Floor 15” AND “Car call pressed (pulse)” 04004F84<br />

“Landing calls blocked” AND “Car calls blocked” 18000084<br />

“Safety circuit error” 20000084<br />

“Evacuation complete” 40000084<br />

“Floor 1” AND “Flag 0 active” 80004184<br />

162 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


*In discrete signal mode (bit 13 = “1”) bits 8 ... 12 have a di fferent function:<br />

1:<br />

2:<br />

3:<br />

4:<br />

5:<br />

6:<br />

7:<br />

8:<br />

ramp drive active<br />

fire ecavuation complete<br />

door A is closing<br />

door B is closing<br />

door C is closing<br />

fire- or fireman-mode is active<br />

fire-hooter active<br />

forced closing of car door<br />

Fig. 6.10 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

fixed pattern for<br />

signal<br />

floor<br />

discrete signal mode*<br />

enable the floor<br />

signal**<br />

door A closed<br />

door B closed<br />

door C closed<br />

door A opened<br />

door B opened<br />

door C opened<br />

level-signal<br />

drive-signal<br />

direction up<br />

direction down<br />

car call pressed (pulse)<br />

landing call pressed (pulse)<br />

landing calls locked<br />

car calls locked<br />

safety circuit faulty<br />

evacuation complete<br />

flag 0 active<br />

**Is the floor signal not activated (bit 14 = “0”) and the discrete signal mode not activated (bit 13 = “0”),<br />

bits 8 ...11 have a different function:<br />

bit 8: car light on<br />

bit 9: retiring cam on<br />

bit 10: drive requested<br />

bit 11: car in accurate level (within relevelling limits)<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 163


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function “evacuation”<br />

evacuation speed<br />

door state<br />

Fig. 6.11 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

The function “evacuation” enables triggering an evacuation drive using the<br />

terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

Bit 21 ... 23: door state after<br />

evacuation completed<br />

Bit 24: inverter supported<br />

evacuation drive<br />

all doors stay opened<br />

all doors stay closed<br />

only door A is opened and stays opened<br />

only door A is opened and closes again<br />

only door B is opened and stays opened<br />

only door B is opened and closes again<br />

door A+B is opened and stay opened<br />

door A+B is opened and close again<br />

164 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Examples Function RAW register<br />

Evacuation floor 0, evacuation speed = automatic,<br />

open all doors after evacuation<br />

Closest evacuation floor, evacuation speed =<br />

automatic, open all doors after evacuation<br />

Closest evacuation floor, evacuation speed = V1, do<br />

not open doors after evacuation<br />

0000009A<br />

0000409A<br />

0020409A<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 165


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function “special drive”<br />

door to be opened<br />

Fig. 6.12 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

The function “special drive” enables triggering a special drive using the<br />

terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

fixed pattern for<br />

special drive<br />

target floor<br />

not used<br />

not used<br />

go to blocked floors<br />

suppress direction/departure arrows<br />

open all available doors<br />

homing drive<br />

parking drive<br />

reverse stop without opening the doors<br />

special drive only with adjusted speed<br />

target floor = pseudo floor<br />

car door to be opened<br />

drive speed<br />

drive speed<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Target floor 1, open first 002401AA<br />

available door<br />

Target floor 0, park drive, suppress direction 041200AA<br />

display,<br />

do not open doors<br />

166 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Function “alarm misuse”<br />

Fig. 6.13 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

The function “alarm misuse” enables control of a relay that is in series with<br />

the alarm button (e.g. for emergency call forwarding) so that unjustified<br />

emergency calls can be suppressed.<br />

The relay always activates if:<br />

- the car is moving (no malfunction).<br />

- the car is levelled on a floor and the car door is open.<br />

- the emergency call button was operated shorter than the selected<br />

delay.<br />

Emergency calls can only be placed after the relay has released!<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

fixed pattern for<br />

alarm misuse<br />

delay time in<br />

seconds<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Function alarm misuse, delay 10 sec 00000AB4<br />

Function alarm misuse, delay 20 sec 000014B4<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 167


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function “speed threshold”<br />

Fig. 6.14 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

The function “speed threshold” enables an output on the terminal of a<br />

programmable input/output if the speed falls below the speed threshold.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

Calculation The speed must be entered in the RAW register as a hexadecimal value.<br />

The conversion from decimal to hexadecimal values is done recursively<br />

digit by digit until the decimal value is RAW register = 00012CBC<br />

168 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Function “ramp drive”<br />

Fig. 6.15 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Settings of the four inputs<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

The function “ramp drive” enables provision of the inputs required for a<br />

ramp drive on the terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

A ramp drive enables controlled movements of the car in dead man control<br />

in an extended door zone with the car doors fully open. This function<br />

requires four inputs:<br />

- Activate ramp drive<br />

- Button UP (dead man)<br />

- Button DOWN (dead man)<br />

- Door limit switch UP of car door<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

function number: ramp drive ON<br />

drive UP<br />

drive DOWN<br />

car door limit switch opened<br />

fixed pattern for<br />

ramp drive<br />

function number<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Activate ramp 000000D2<br />

drive<br />

Ramp drive, button 000001D2<br />

UP<br />

Ramp drive, button 000002D2<br />

DOWN<br />

Ramp drive, door limit switch 000003D2<br />

opened<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 169


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

Function “override floor blocking”<br />

Fig. 6.16 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

The function “override floor blocking” enables deactivation of the floor<br />

blocking function using the terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

fixed pattern for<br />

override floor blocking<br />

override floor blocking<br />

for car calls<br />

override floor blocking<br />

for landing calls<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Override floor blocking for car 000001EA<br />

calls.<br />

Override floor blocking for landing 000002EA<br />

calls.<br />

Override floor blocking for car and landing 000003EA<br />

calls.<br />

170 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Function “block floors”<br />

All activated floors “1” will be blocked with the options of bit 23 ... 31.<br />

floor groups: 0: bit 8 .. 22 = floor 0 .. 15<br />

1: bit 8 .. 22 = floor 15 .. 31<br />

2: bit 8 .. 22 = floor 32 .. 47<br />

3: bit 8 .. 22 = floor 48 .. 63<br />

Fig. 6.17 Functions of the separate bits of the RAW register<br />

Examples<br />

6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

The function “block floors” enables the dynamic blocking of floors using the<br />

terminal of a programmable input/output.<br />

Select menu item MAIN MENU - Configuration - I\O<br />

Configuration - I\O Ports - RAW and select the input/output to<br />

be parametrised (�+�).<br />

fixed pattern for<br />

floor blocking<br />

use secondary landing<br />

call enabling<br />

floor group<br />

use secondary car<br />

call enabling<br />

Function RAW register<br />

Block floor 0, door A, car 500001FA<br />

calls blocked<br />

Block floors 0 and 1, door B, landing A00003FA<br />

calls blocked<br />

Block floors 0 .. 7, doors A and B, car and F000FFFA<br />

landing<br />

calls blocked<br />

Block floors 16 .. 23, doors A and B, car and F200FFFA<br />

landing<br />

calls blocked<br />

Block floors 32 .. 39, doors A and B, car and landing<br />

calls blocked<br />

F400FFFA<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 171


6 Programmable inputs and outputs<br />

172 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


7 Error List<br />

7.1 LC-Display<br />

ERROR [00037\00040]<br />

28.09 10:18:26 [012]<br />

Door close failed<br />

FLOOR:03 V00 R01 I00<br />

ERROR [00037\00040]<br />

28.09 10:18:26 [012]<br />

Door close failed<br />

01 02 00 00 00 00 00<br />

7.2 Keypad functions<br />

7 Error List<br />

7.1 LC-Display<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> stores up to 100 event and error messages. These<br />

messages can be called up on the user interface of the FST, with the PC-<br />

Card or via remote data transmission at any time.<br />

A Event/error no. 37 of 40 total<br />

B Date / Time / Message Code<br />

C Text description of event/error<br />

D Floor /<br />

generated signals (see “Position Pos: Virt=0b<br />

messages<br />

Real=00” on page 20) /<br />

actual signals (see “Position Pos: Virt=0b messages Real=00”<br />

on page 20) /<br />

information byte Infobyte1 (see “Error messages” on page 175)<br />

A Event/error no. 37 of 40 total<br />

B Date / Time / Message Code<br />

C Text description of event/error<br />

D Information bytes: Infobyte2 .. Infobyte8<br />

�<br />

�<br />

�+�<br />

�+�<br />

Switch to 2nd to 8th information byte<br />

Back to initial display<br />

Scroll error list up<br />

Scroll error list down<br />

FST_HB.EN12/05 173


7 Error List<br />

7.3 Event messages<br />

7.3 Event messages<br />

Code Message Description Reason<br />

128 COLDSTART Power supply of the FST-2 was<br />

interrupted and is back on.<br />

129 INSPECTION–ON<br />

- The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> was<br />

switched off and on again on<br />

the fuse or the main switch.<br />

- There was a power failure.<br />

Inspection work is being carried out. The inspection switch on the car<br />

roof is set to INSPECTION.<br />

INSPECTION–OFF<br />

POWER LOST 131 Failure of the 24V power supply. The system was shut down or<br />

the power supply is faulty.<br />

132 REMOTE RESET The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> was reset by<br />

the GST Group <strong>Controller</strong>.<br />

133 CALIBRATION–START<br />

CALIBRATION–OK!<br />

134 LEARN DRIVE–START<br />

The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> was reset<br />

through the serial interface.<br />

Calibration progress is displayed. A calibration drive was triggered.<br />

Learn drive progress is displayed. A learn drive was triggered.<br />

DRIVE–OK!<br />

LEARN<br />

UPDATE The software of the FST was<br />

135 SOFTWARE<br />

updated with a PC-Card.<br />

136 An EVACUATION–ON<br />

evacuation drive was carried out. The evacuation signal on a<br />

programmable input/output was<br />

EVACUATION–OFF<br />

active.<br />

EVACUATION–OK<br />

137 X12-SERIAL OK DCP interface X12 in operation. The serial DCP interface X11<br />

between FST and frequency<br />

converter was initialised<br />

correctly (e.g. after switching<br />

on).<br />

138 MONITOR SIGNAL–ON<br />

MONITOR SIGNAL–OFF<br />

139 APRON OUT–ON<br />

APRON OUT–OFF<br />

State change on the programmable<br />

“Monitor” input.<br />

State change on the “Apron<br />

Monitoring” input.<br />

140 ORIENTATION Orientation drive with incremental<br />

positioning.<br />

BATTERY–EMPTY The FST-2 battery is empty and<br />

141<br />

must be changed.<br />

AUXILIARY– Auxiliary control was switched on or<br />

143<br />

off.<br />

The programmable “Monitor”<br />

input has changed its state. This<br />

input can be used to enter state<br />

changes of any signal in the error<br />

storage (see “Programmable<br />

inputs and outputs” on<br />

page 147).<br />

The state of the electronically<br />

monitored apron for small shaft<br />

pits is entered in the error<br />

storage as a message.<br />

- Power failure for more than 30<br />

seconds<br />

- Power failure with car not in<br />

levelling position<br />

- Strong discrepancy between<br />

solenoid switch states KO, KU<br />

and Zone B<br />

The auxiliary switch in the control<br />

cabinet was activated.<br />

174 FST_HB.EN12/05


7.4 Error messages<br />

Code Message Description Reason<br />

NMI Major CPU error determined 1 by<br />

Watchdog supervision.<br />

STOP–ON<br />

3 „ON“ EMERGENCY and „OFF“ states of the<br />

emergency device that has triggered<br />

EMERGENCY STOP–OFF<br />

are displayed.<br />

Internal error<br />

7 Error List<br />

7.4 Error messages<br />

Interruption of the safety circuit<br />

before terminal FST X14.7. All<br />

safety circuit inputs of the preselection<br />

module are idle.<br />

RESTART 4<br />

DRIVE–BOOT 5<br />

Warm start of he FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> - All four arrow buttons were<br />

pressed simultaneously<br />

- Menu item FST Reset was<br />

activated<br />

Error during start up of drive<br />

process.<br />

Internal error<br />

6 DRIVE–WATCHDOG Major CPU error in drive process<br />

area determined by Watchdog<br />

supervision.<br />

7 DRIVE–XFER Error during transmission of data<br />

relevant for drive process.<br />

9 OPEN DOOR LOCK Door contact open while the car is<br />

moving.<br />

Infobyte2:<br />

Safety circuit status:<br />

bit 0 .. 2: Not assigned<br />

bit 3: Emergency stop<br />

bit 4: Door contact C<br />

bit 5: Door contact B<br />

bit 6: Door contact A<br />

bit 7: Locking device<br />

(“0” = interrupted,<br />

“1” = closed)<br />

10 MISSED TARGET When approaching the target floor<br />

the programmed levelling position<br />

was not reached or exceeded.<br />

Internal error<br />

Internal error<br />

The safety circuit of the door<br />

circuit was interrupted while the<br />

car was moving. Infobyte2<br />

shows if the interruption was<br />

caused by a car or a shaft door.<br />

- Drive is not working accurately<br />

or is load dependent.<br />

- Increase crawling distance<br />

(see “Global –” on page 127).<br />

- Carry out another calibration<br />

run.<br />

- Check switch off points before<br />

levelling (see “Floor –” on<br />

page 127).<br />

FST_HB.EN12/05 175


7 Error List<br />

7.4 Error messages<br />

Code Message Description Reason<br />

11 DOOR OPEN FAILED Car door does not open.<br />

Infobyte2:<br />

Safety circuit status:<br />

bit 0 .. 2: Not assigned<br />

bit 3: Emergency stop<br />

bit 4: Door contact C<br />

bit 5: Door contact B<br />

bit 6: Door contact A<br />

bit 7: Locking device<br />

(“0” = interrupted,<br />

“1” = closed)<br />

DOOR CLOSE FAILED Car door does not close.<br />

12<br />

Infobyte2:<br />

0 = Door A<br />

1 = Door B<br />

2 = Door C<br />

Infobyte3:<br />

1 = fully open, limit switch OPEN is<br />

activated<br />

2 = does not close all the way, limit<br />

switch CLOSED does not activate<br />

DOOR LOCK RETRY CNT Error during closing of doors.<br />

13<br />

Infobyte2:<br />

0 = Door A<br />

1 = Door B<br />

2 = Door C<br />

The number of failed lock attempts is<br />

displayed under MAIN MENU -<br />

Doors - Doors Basic -<br />

Lock fail Max<br />

DRM–START PROBLEM Reset TEST MENU - Fault<br />

14<br />

Reset.<br />

DRM–DRIVE MONITOR Monitoring or drive error.<br />

15<br />

No movement of the car could be<br />

determined during the drive.<br />

Reset TEST MENU - Fault<br />

Reset.<br />

- Check door drive.<br />

- Check wiring of the safety<br />

circuit.<br />

- Check operation of door relays<br />

on FSM.<br />

- Check operation of door limit<br />

switches and jumpers FSM<br />

J21, J31, J71 and J81.<br />

- Infobyte2 shows the state of<br />

the safety circuit at the time of<br />

the error message.<br />

- The car door is blocked<br />

mechanically or electrically.<br />

- Check operation of door relays<br />

on FSM.<br />

- Check operation of door limit<br />

switches and jumpers FSM<br />

J21, J31, J71 and J81.<br />

The shaft door contact (lock)<br />

does not close even after n<br />

attempts.<br />

The car does not start moving<br />

even with pre-selection active.<br />

The encoder position does not<br />

change even with pre-selection<br />

active.<br />

- The encoder is faulty.<br />

- No electric connection to<br />

encoder.<br />

- The drive does not move.<br />

176 FST_HB.EN12/05


Code Message Description Reason<br />

16 DRM-ENCODER FAILURE Plausibility testing of car position<br />

with the encoder is faulty.<br />

Reset TEST MENU - Fault<br />

Reset.<br />

17 DRM-CAR COMMS FAIL Communication between the FST-<br />

<strong>Controller</strong> and the FSM car control<br />

module is faulty.<br />

DRM-END FLOOR SPEED Reset TEST MENU - Fault<br />

18<br />

Reset.<br />

19 DRM-MISSING ZONE No zone message available.<br />

Reset TEST MENU - Fault<br />

Reset.<br />

20 DRM-BRAKE FAILURE The brakes do not react or cannot be<br />

released.<br />

Reset TEST MENU - Fault<br />

Reset.<br />

21 DRM-MOTOR FAILURE Temperature monitoring of the drive<br />

has triggered.<br />

22 DRM-FORCED STOP The input signal “Forced Stop” on a<br />

programmable input was active. The<br />

car is shut down on the floor with the<br />

door open.<br />

DRM-EMERG.LIMIT SW Exceeding the top floor according to<br />

23<br />

EN81 (for hydraulic lifts).<br />

TEST MENU - Fault<br />

Reset<br />

Reset.<br />

DRM-DOOR FAILURE The car door cannot be moved.<br />

24<br />

TEST MENU - Fault<br />

Reset<br />

Reset.<br />

7 Error List<br />

7.4 Error messages<br />

- The encoder is faulty.<br />

- Check electric connection of<br />

the encoder.<br />

- During commissioning: Check<br />

direction of rotation of the<br />

encoder and carry out “Set<br />

Floor 0”.<br />

- Plug-in connections of the<br />

trailing ribbon cable are not<br />

plugged or are loose.<br />

- Rupture in trailing ribbon cable.<br />

- FSM car control module faulty.<br />

- Check jumper position JK1,<br />

JK2 and JK3 on the car control<br />

module.<br />

The delay control circuit at the<br />

top and bottom limits has<br />

triggered.<br />

The car has reached a levelling<br />

position but does not receive a<br />

zone message from the safety<br />

circuit.<br />

Check safety circuit and zone<br />

solenoid switches.<br />

- The brake does not release<br />

even with pre-selection active.<br />

- The brake does not close even<br />

with the car stopped.<br />

Monitoring via inputs FST X1.19<br />

and X1.20 (see “Brake<br />

monitoring” on page 106).<br />

Motor overheated.<br />

Monitoring via input FST X1.22<br />

(see “Motor monitoring” on<br />

page 106).<br />

Please refer to the system<br />

specific wiring diagrams for<br />

information on which signal has<br />

triggered the forced stop. Also<br />

see “Programmable inputs and<br />

outputs” on page 147.<br />

The top emergency end switch<br />

has triggered. The contact is<br />

sampled by terminal FST X14.6<br />

(“TC”).<br />

Door control is active but the car<br />

door does not move. The<br />

controller shuts down the<br />

system.<br />

FST_HB.EN12/05 177


7 Error List<br />

7.4 Error messages<br />

Code Message Description Reason<br />

25 DRM-CONTACTOR MONIT. The contactor drop-out protection<br />

has triggered.<br />

26 DRM-SPECIAL I\O-PORT The special function monitored by a<br />

programmable input “Special I/O<br />

port” failed.<br />

27 SLIP OUTSIDE LEVEL Unexpected car movement out of<br />

the stopping position.<br />

28 SLIP OUTSIDE ZONE Unexpected car movement out of<br />

the zone.<br />

29 DRIVE: CHKSUM-ERROR Error during transmission of drive<br />

data from/to drive processor<br />

Terminal FST X1.23 must be<br />

supplied with 24V when the<br />

system is at rest. Verify circuit<br />

according to wiring diagram and<br />

increase parameter<br />

Contactor Monit.Time if<br />

required (see page 107).<br />

One of the terminals X1.4 ..<br />

X1.11 is assigned to the function<br />

“Special I/O port” (see wiring<br />

diagram). The switching<br />

sequence of this input is<br />

checked.<br />

The drive does not stop at the<br />

levelling position even with preselection<br />

disabled.<br />

- The deceleration distance of<br />

the drive is too long.<br />

- The drive brake activates too<br />

late.<br />

- Check encoder function.<br />

The drive does not stop at the<br />

levelling position even with preselection<br />

disabled.<br />

- The deceleration distance of<br />

the drive is too long.<br />

- The drive brake activates too<br />

late.<br />

- Check encoder function.<br />

Internal error<br />

30 BUS-I\F TIMEOUT Fault in bus interface. Internal error<br />

START-ABORT 31<br />

STOP-ABORT 32<br />

Drive start sequence cancelled.<br />

Drive stop sequence cancelled.<br />

The drive cannot be started. No<br />

return signals from drive or<br />

signals delayed.<br />

- See FST X1.19, X1.20 brake<br />

monitoring.<br />

- See wiring diagram FST<br />

X1.11.<br />

- See “Brake delay” on<br />

page 106.<br />

The drive cannot be stopped. No<br />

return signals from drive or<br />

signals delayed.<br />

- See FST X1.19, X1.20 brake<br />

monitoring.<br />

- See wiring diagram FST<br />

X1.11.<br />

- See “Brake delay” on<br />

page 106.<br />

178 FST_HB.EN12/05


Code Message Description Reason<br />

33 RELEVELLING ABORT An error has occurred during<br />

relevelling and the relevelling<br />

process was cancelled.<br />

34 BYPASS FAILURE Safety circuit bypass not available<br />

despite zone message.<br />

35 DOOR LOCK TIMEOUT The set door lock timeout is not long<br />

enough.<br />

7 Error List<br />

7.4 Error messages<br />

- Check drive and pre-selection.<br />

- Check safety circuit bypass.<br />

- Check bypass relay FST K20.<br />

- See “Bypass t–OFF” on<br />

page 139.<br />

- Check bypass relay FST K20.<br />

- Check wiring of the safety<br />

circuit.<br />

- Check the safety circuit.<br />

- See “Bypass t–OFF” on<br />

page 139.<br />

The car door is closed but the<br />

lock contact has not closed in the<br />

time set.<br />

- Check shaft doors<br />

mechanically (smooth<br />

running).<br />

- Check door lock contacts.<br />

- Increase door lock timeout<br />

(see “Lock delay” on<br />

page 139).<br />

36 CAR LIGHT FAILURE FSM sensor detected faulty car light. - Check car light.<br />

- Check sensor on FSM (jumper<br />

J112).<br />

37 REGULATOR ERROR- Error message from the frequency<br />

converter when using a converter<br />

with serial control.<br />

38 REFILL PUMP TIMEOUT Error during refilling of the hydraulic<br />

counterweight.<br />

39 SAFETY CURTAIN BRK. The safety curtain has been<br />

interrupted while the car was<br />

moving.<br />

Check error list of the frequency<br />

converter. The number of the<br />

regulator error corresponds to<br />

the error code in the<br />

documentation of the frequency<br />

converter.<br />

The cut-off pressure for refilling<br />

was not reached within 30<br />

seconds. Check function and<br />

control of the refill valve.<br />

Check function and control of the<br />

safety curtain (see “SS-Curtain”<br />

on page 140).<br />

40 SAFETY CURTAIN FAIL Error during test of safety curtain. The FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> issues a<br />

test signal for the safety curtain<br />

via FSM X7 or X9 before each<br />

drive. The safety curtain<br />

acknowledges the test signal<br />

with an interruption of the safety<br />

circuit.<br />

- Check operation of the safety<br />

curtain.<br />

- Check duration of the test<br />

impulse in MAIN MENU -<br />

Doors - Doors Basic<br />

- SS-CurtainWait (see<br />

“SS-CurtainWait” on<br />

page 140).<br />

FST_HB.EN12/05 179


7 Error List<br />

7.4 Error messages<br />

Code Message Description Reason<br />

41 X12-SERIAL OFF No serial connection to the<br />

frequency converter (FST X11,<br />

DCP).<br />

42 X-12 SERIAL BAD Serial connection to the frequency<br />

converter is faulty (FST X11, DCP).<br />

43 UPS FAILURE<br />

UPS FAILURE–ON<br />

44 APRON–ERROR<br />

45 EMERG. HALT TEST<br />

ERROR<br />

State change at the programmable<br />

input “UPS FAILURE” for monitoring<br />

UPS error messages.<br />

The emergency stop test for inclined<br />

lifts failed.<br />

46 UNEXPECTED STOP Error in the DCP communication<br />

between FST-2 and frequency<br />

converter.<br />

- Check connection cable<br />

between FST X11 and<br />

frequency converter.<br />

- Check settings of the<br />

frequency converter (DCP03).<br />

- Check connection cable<br />

between FST X11 and<br />

frequency converter.<br />

- Check shielding of the<br />

connection cable.<br />

Check operation of the UPS.<br />

47 ASV ERROR- Error in pawl device control. Check the signal interface of the<br />

pawl device (see description of<br />

the pawl device).<br />

MOTOR-ROOM OVERHEAT The thermostat in the machine<br />

48<br />

compartment has triggered<br />

(temperature >40 °C / 104 °F).<br />

REVISION TOO FAST Inspection or auxiliary speed over<br />

40<br />

800 mm/s (2.6 ft/s).<br />

Monitoring via terminal FST<br />

X1.16.<br />

Check drive speeds and shaft<br />

positioning.<br />

180 FST_HB.EN12/05


8 Index<br />

Numerics<br />

24V LOW! ........................................................................11<br />

32-bit register .................................................................148<br />

A<br />

Absolute value encoder .....................................................15<br />

Action ..........................................................................5, 95<br />

ADM ................................................................................81<br />

X1 82, 85<br />

X2 82, 85<br />

ADM I landing button module .............................................81<br />

ADM unconfigured! ...........................................................28<br />

ADM-<strong>Bus</strong> Mask ...............................................................116<br />

Alarm misuse .................................................................151<br />

Anti nuisance ..................................................................116<br />

Apply–ALL .....................................................................139<br />

Approaching ...................................................................139<br />

Approaching with open doors .............................................44<br />

APRON–OPEN! ................................................................12<br />

Associated bus .................................................................36<br />

Auto test drive ..................................................27, 112, 145<br />

Auto-Orien. .....................................................................129<br />

AUXILIARY ......................................................................13<br />

B<br />

Block floors ....................................................................171<br />

Blocking floors ................................................................147<br />

BO/BURunoff .................................................................130<br />

Boot version .....................................................................31<br />

Bottom Flr. Car ...............................................................114<br />

Bottom Flr. Hall ...............................................................114<br />

Brake delay ....................................................................106<br />

Brake monitoring .......................................................45, 106<br />

<strong>Bus</strong> plan ...........................................................................36<br />

Bypass t–OFF ................................................................139<br />

Bypass t–ON ..................................................................139<br />

C<br />

Cable length .....................................................................36<br />

Cable lifts .........................................................................37<br />

Cal. V-tolerance ..............................................................111<br />

Calibration abort! ..............................................................28<br />

CALIBRATION DRIVE .......................................................12<br />

Calibration drive ........................................................31, 111<br />

Cal-Results – ..................................................................129<br />

Cam delay ......................................................................139<br />

Cam time Max ................................................................139<br />

Car button extension .........................................................68<br />

8 Index<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 181


8 Index<br />

Car button panel .......................... 65, 69, 70, 73, 75, 78, 79<br />

Car call ............................................................... 27, 32, 33<br />

Car control ....................................................................... 27<br />

Car doors ...................................................................... 139<br />

Car light ........................................................................ 116<br />

CAR NUISANCE DETECT! ............................................... 29<br />

Car position ..................................................................... 14<br />

Car prio. type ................................................................. 111<br />

Car speed ....................................................................... 14<br />

Car ventilator ................................................. 116, 122, 127<br />

Card Reader .................................................................. 117<br />

CB/CT–Level ................................................................. 130<br />

Change delay ................................................................ 142<br />

Change time .................................................................. 107<br />

Checking Update File ....................................................... 29<br />

Chime ........................................................................... 117<br />

Circuit documentation ....................................................... 36<br />

Clear card ..................................................................... 137<br />

Clock setting .................................................................. 136<br />

CLOSE = A+B ............................................................... 117<br />

Coding ............................................................................ 24<br />

Commissioning security level .................................... 95, 136<br />

Component overview ........................................................ 36<br />

Config Card .............................................................. 137<br />

CONFIG TRANSFER ERR! ............................................... 28<br />

CONFIG TRANSFER OK! ................................................. 28<br />

Contact voltage protection ................................................... 7<br />

Contactor monitoring ...................................................... 107<br />

Control .......................................................................... 129<br />

Corr.Bottom ................................................................... 130<br />

Corr.Top ........................................................................ 130<br />

Correction switches .......................................................... 42<br />

Correct-levelling ............................................................. 111<br />

Counter values ............................................................... 104<br />

Crawl distance ............................................................... 128<br />

CTRL ............................................................................ 114<br />

D<br />

CONFIG .......................................................................... 28<br />

Data packets ................................................................... 15<br />

Date setting ................................................................... 136<br />

Daylight saving ...................................................... 136, 138<br />

Debounce value (flag) ..................................................... 159<br />

Decoding ......................................................................... 17<br />

Decouple Max ................................................................ 141<br />

Decoupling .................................................................... 141<br />

Deenergize .................................................................... 142<br />

Default position of doors ................................................. 134<br />

Delay (flag) .................................................................... 159<br />

Depart.Arrows Max ......................................................... 121<br />

182 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Departure .........................................................................83<br />

Departure arrows ............................................................121<br />

Detail .............................................................................136<br />

Device status ....................................................................34<br />

Diagnosis .........................................................................15<br />

Diagnostic message ..........................................................10<br />

Diagnostic messages ............................................10, 14, 33<br />

DIN EN 81 ..........................................................................7<br />

DIN VDE 0100 ....................................................................7<br />

Direction ........................................................................120<br />

Direction display ...............................................................27<br />

Direction of rotation .........................................................127<br />

Direction of travel ..............................................................83<br />

Display-0 .. 2 ..................................................................117<br />

Divider-Door ...................................................................117<br />

Door cycle counter ..........................................................104<br />

Door cycles ....................................................................104<br />

DOOR LOCK B OPEN ......................................................10<br />

Door nudging ..................................................................142<br />

Door type .......................................................................140<br />

DoorC=Emerg-EndSw. ....................................................121<br />

DOOR-NUDGING! ............................................................29<br />

Doors .............................................................................139<br />

Drive counter ............................................................14, 104<br />

Drive curve .....................................................................136<br />

Drive mode messages .......................................................27<br />

Drive processor ................................................................34<br />

Drive speeds ..................................................................106<br />

Drive type .......................................................................106<br />

Drives ....................................................................104, 106<br />

DRM ................................................................................12<br />

DRM test ........................................................................145<br />

DRM-Door ......................................................................140<br />

DRV–TEST FINISHED! .....................................................29<br />

DRV–TEST STARTED! .....................................................29<br />

Dual door mode ................................................................66<br />

E<br />

EAZ ...............................................................................116<br />

EAZ Configuration ...........................................................114<br />

EAZ text .........................................................................114<br />

Electrical isolation .............................................................37<br />

Electromagnetic compatibility ...............................................8<br />

EMC ..................................................................................8<br />

EMERGENCY OPERATION ..............................................28<br />

Emergency stop ..............................................................107<br />

Emergency stop detection .................................................40<br />

EMERGENCY STOP–CAR ................................................11<br />

EN 12015 ...........................................................................8<br />

EN 12016 ...........................................................................8<br />

EN 55011 ...........................................................................8<br />

EN 61000-4-2/1995 .............................................................8<br />

EN 61000-4-3/1997 .............................................................8<br />

8 Index<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 183


8 Index<br />

EN 61000-4-4/1995 ............................................................ 8<br />

Encoder failure ................................................................. 16<br />

Encoder type ................................................................. 128<br />

Encoder-B simulation ................................................. 40, 56<br />

End switch test bottom .................................................... 145<br />

End switch test top ................................................. 145, 146<br />

END-SWITCH TEST ........................................................ 11<br />

ERROR ..................................................................... 34, 42<br />

Error list ........................................................................ 173<br />

Error message ................................................................. 34<br />

Error Messages ............................................................. 105<br />

Error messages ............................................................. 175<br />

Error storage ......................................................... 104, 173<br />

ES-SPEED MON. TEST ................................................... 11<br />

EVACUATION ................................................................. 11<br />

Evacuation .................................................................... 164<br />

Event channels .............................................................. 138<br />

Event messages ............................................................ 174<br />

EXIN1 ............................................................................. 15<br />

EXIN2 ............................................................................. 15<br />

F<br />

Factory number .............................................................. 115<br />

Fault reset ..................................................................... 145<br />

Fax ............................................................................... 113<br />

Fax number ................................................................... 113<br />

FAX/SMS NOT SENT! ...................................................... 28<br />

FAX/SMS SENT OK! ........................................................ 28<br />

FILE NOT FOUND! .......................................................... 28<br />

FILE TRANSFER ACTIVE ................................................ 12<br />

Filter setting ................................................................... 136<br />

Fire Main Floor ............................................................... 118<br />

Fire signal ............................................................... 83, 154<br />

FIREMAN ........................................................................ 11<br />

FIREMAN MODE ............................................................. 12<br />

Fireman Options ............................................................ 118<br />

Flag ...................................................................... 114, 157<br />

Flag control ................................................................... 159<br />

Flag function .................................................................. 158<br />

Flags ............................................................. 114, 147, 157<br />

Flash memory ............................................................ 26, 37<br />

Floor-locking .................................................................. 113<br />

Flr Offset-Car ................................................................. 115<br />

Flr Offset-Landing .......................................................... 115<br />

Forced stop ................................................................... 151<br />

FPA ................................................................................ 77<br />

X4 78<br />

X5 78<br />

X6 78<br />

X7 79<br />

FPE ................................................................................ 72<br />

X2 73, 75<br />

184 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


X3 76<br />

FPE car panel extension module ..................................72, 77<br />

FPM ................................................................................65<br />

X3 68<br />

X4 70<br />

FPM car panel module ................................................31, 65<br />

Front panel .........................................................................9<br />

FSM ................................................................................53<br />

FSM car control module ...............................................31, 53<br />

FSM X6 ...........................................................................15<br />

FST Installation & Commissioning ........................................6<br />

FST <strong>Manual</strong> .......................................................................6<br />

FST Menus ......................................................................95<br />

FST Quick Guide ................................................................6<br />

FST Reset! .....................................................................137<br />

FST software update .........................................................28<br />

FST-2 main circuit board .................................................147<br />

FST-2-<strong>Controller</strong> ...............................................................37<br />

FULL LOAD .....................................................................13<br />

Full load .........................................................................151<br />

Function number .............................................................151<br />

Further information ..............................................................6<br />

G<br />

General Safety Regulations .................................................7<br />

GND-PE coupling .............................................................40<br />

Group floor offset ............................................................115<br />

Group member ...............................................................115<br />

Group mode .......................................................56, 67, 115<br />

Group settings ................................................................115<br />

Group statistics ...............................................................136<br />

GST Group <strong>Controller</strong> ...............................................67, 115<br />

GST <strong>Manual</strong> .......................................................................6<br />

GST menu .....................................................................115<br />

GST UPDATE COMPLETE! ...............................................28<br />

H<br />

H8IN1 ..............................................................................15<br />

Handling electronic components ...........................................8<br />

Hardware version ..............................................................31<br />

Holding device ............................................15, 26, 107, 108<br />

HOMING ACTIVE .............................................................13<br />

Humidity ...........................................................................38<br />

Hydraulic lifts ....................................................................37<br />

I<br />

I/O error .........................................................................148<br />

I/O Error – ......................................................................114<br />

I/O flags .........................................................................148<br />

I/O ports .........................................................................148<br />

ID ....................................................................................31<br />

Identification .............................................................31, 115<br />

8 Index<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 185


8 Index<br />

Incremental positioning ................................................... 129<br />

Information page .................................................. 31, 33, 34<br />

Information texts .............................................................. 28<br />

Input EXIN2 ..................................................................... 22<br />

Input functions ............................................................... 147<br />

Input H8IN1 ..................................................................... 23<br />

Insp.DOWN ................................................................... 128<br />

Insp.FAST ..................................................................... 128<br />

Insp.UP ......................................................................... 128<br />

INSPECTION ................................................................... 12<br />

INSTALLATION MODE ..................................................... 12<br />

Installation mode ............................................................ 111<br />

Installation site ................................................................. 36<br />

J<br />

Jumpers .......................................................................... 40<br />

Jumpers – FPM ............................................................... 66<br />

Jumpers – FSM ......................55, 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63<br />

K<br />

Key combination ................................................................ 5<br />

Keypad ....................................................................... 9, 37<br />

Keypad functions ................................................. 6, 32, 173<br />

L<br />

Landing call ............................................................. 27, 153<br />

LANDING CALLS OFF ..................................................... 11<br />

Landing chime ............................................................... 115<br />

Landing control .......................................................... 27, 33<br />

LANDING CONTROL OFF ................................................ 11<br />

Landing control OFF ....................................................... 151<br />

Landing DOWN .............................................................. 127<br />

Landing panel .................................................................. 81<br />

Landing prio. type ........................................................... 111<br />

Landing UP ................................................................... 127<br />

Language ...................................................................... 136<br />

LC-Display ....................................................... 6, 9, 37, 173<br />

Learn drive .................................................................... 111<br />

LEARN DRIVE ACTIVE .................................................... 12<br />

LEARN DRIVE FAILURE! ................................................. 29<br />

LEARN DRIVE–ABORT .................................................... 12<br />

LEARN DRIVE–OK! ......................................................... 12<br />

LEARN DRIVE–START .................................................... 12<br />

LEARN START FAILURE! ................................................ 29<br />

LED .............................................................................. 105<br />

LEDs ......................................................................... 42, 43<br />

LEDs – ADM I ...................................................... 82, 85, 88<br />

LEDs – FPM .................................................................... 68<br />

LEDs – FSM ................................ 57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63<br />

LEDs – FST ....................................................................... 9<br />

LEDs – FST-2 ............................................................ 34, 42<br />

Level ............................................................................... 14<br />

186 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Levelling ..........................................................................14<br />

Levelling position ............................................................127<br />

<strong>Lift</strong> ID .............................................................................115<br />

Limit DN OFF .................................................................128<br />

Limit DN ON ...................................................................128<br />

Limit switches .................................................................141<br />

Limit UP OFF .................................................................128<br />

Limit UP ON ...................................................................128<br />

Line A ..............................................................................10<br />

Line B ..............................................................................11<br />

Line C ..............................................................................13<br />

LMS ...............................................................................113<br />

Loading button ..................................................................14<br />

Lock delay ......................................................................139<br />

Lock fail Max ..................................................................139<br />

Lock fail open .................................................................139<br />

LON bus ....................................................................36, 91<br />

LON configuration ...........................................................112<br />

LON-EAZ .......................................................................114<br />

M<br />

Main menu .................................................................33, 95<br />

Main menu and test menu ...........................................31, 33<br />

Main screen ...............................................................10, 33<br />

Maintenance security level .........................................95, 136<br />

<strong>Manual</strong> door ...................................................................141<br />

MASK ............................................................................114<br />

Measures ...........................................................................7<br />

Memory ...........................................................................14<br />

Menu tree .........................................................................95<br />

Message packets from car control module ...........................15<br />

Messages ........................................................................10<br />

Min. Wait Car .................................................................142<br />

Min. Wait Landing ...........................................................142<br />

Modem ....................................................................37, 113<br />

Motor hours ..............................................................14, 104<br />

Motor monitoring .......................................................45, 106<br />

Motor run-on ...................................................................106<br />

Motor state .................................................................15, 19<br />

Motor states .....................................................................19<br />

N<br />

Next possible stop .......................................................15, 22<br />

NO SIGNAL .....................................................................28<br />

NO SIGNAL .....................................................................28<br />

NOT FROM END FLOOR! .................................................29<br />

NOT IN FLOOR-0! ............................................................29<br />

NOT IN THE ZONE! ..........................................................29<br />

Nudging .........................................................................141<br />

Nudging output ...............................................................140<br />

Number doors .................................................................139<br />

8 Index<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 187


8 Index<br />

O<br />

ONLY FROM END FLOOR! .............................................. 29<br />

OPEN = A+B ................................................................. 117<br />

Open delay .................................................................... 139<br />

Open hold time .............................................................. 141<br />

Opening time ................................................................. 141<br />

Order number .................................................................. 31<br />

Orien. delay ................................................................... 129<br />

ORIENTATION ................................................................ 12<br />

Original packaging ............................................................. 8<br />

Output functions ............................................................. 147<br />

OVERLOAD .................................................................... 13<br />

Overload ....................................................................... 151<br />

P<br />

Parameter ....................................................................... 95<br />

Parametrising .................................................................. 95<br />

Park drive .............................................................. 111, 112<br />

PARK DRIVE ACTIVE ...................................................... 13<br />

Park drive programs ....................................................... 121<br />

Password ........................................................ 95, 136, 144<br />

PC-Card .......................................................................... 26<br />

PC-CARD EMPTY! ........................................................... 29<br />

PC-CARD FLASH TYPE?? ............................................... 29<br />

PC-CARD LOW BATTERY! .............................................. 29<br />

PC-CARD OK! ................................................................. 29<br />

PC-CARD REMOVED! ..................................................... 29<br />

PC-Card slot .............................................................. 15, 37<br />

PC-Card tools ................................................................ 137<br />

PC-CARD TYPE????! ...................................................... 29<br />

Photocell ................................................................. 14, 141<br />

PhotocellLevel ............................................................... 140<br />

Please wait! ..................................................................... 28<br />

Port ............................................................................... 113<br />

Position ABS ................................................................. 127<br />

Position DOWN .............................................................. 127<br />

Position encoder ...................47, 48, 51, 52, 63, 64, 93, 127<br />

Position messages ..................................................... 15, 20<br />

Position REL .................................................................. 127<br />

Position UP ................................................................... 127<br />

Positioning ..................................................................... 127<br />

Pre-Opening .......................................................... 139, 140<br />

Pre-selection relay ........................................................... 20<br />

PRIO CAR ACTIVE... ....................................................... 28<br />

PRIORITY CAR ............................................................... 13<br />

Priority car ..................................................................... 111<br />

PRIORITY LANDING ........................................................ 13<br />

Priority landing ................................................. 83, 111, 155<br />

Programmable inputs/outputs .......................... 113, 147, 149<br />

Programs ........................................................................ 95<br />

188 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


R<br />

RAW ..............................................................................113<br />

RAW parameters ............................................................148<br />

RAW register ..........................................................127, 148<br />

Recorder ........................................................................136<br />

RECORDING NEW START! ..............................................29<br />

RECORDING RE_START! ................................................29<br />

RECORDING STOPPED! ..................................................29<br />

Regulation for lift systems, AufzV .........................................7<br />

Relevelling .............................................................106, 128<br />

Remains-open ................................................................140<br />

Remote activity ...............................................................136<br />

Remote I/O modules .......................................................147<br />

Remote shutdown .....................................................83, 151<br />

Repeater ..........................................................................37<br />

Resolutn. .......................................................................127<br />

Retry time ......................................................................139<br />

Reversing contact .............................................................14<br />

Reversing time ...............................................................141<br />

RIO traffic .......................................................................137<br />

RS-232 interface ...............................................................47<br />

RUN ..........................................................................34, 42<br />

S<br />

CONFIG ...........................................................................29<br />

S/Ware –> Card ..............................................................137<br />

Safety circuit message ......................................................10<br />

Safety circuit messages ...............................................10, 11<br />

SAFETY CURTAIN ...........................................................12<br />

Safety measures .................................................................7<br />

Safety Regulations ..............................................................7<br />

SCCT debounce .............................................................139<br />

Search LON modules ......................................................112<br />

Security level ..............................................................31, 95<br />

SEND FAX .......................................................................11<br />

Serial connection to frequency converter .....................27, 180<br />

Service ..........................................................................151<br />

SERVICE ACTIVE ............................................................13<br />

Service box ................................................................53, 65<br />

SERVICE REQUIRED! ......................................................13<br />

Servicing security level ..............................................95, 136<br />

Set / actual speed .............................................................14<br />

Set floor [n] .....................................................................111<br />

Set speed ...................................................................15, 22<br />

Setting car doors ...............................................................66<br />

Setting doors ..............................................................55, 56<br />

SFTY-CLOSED is missing .................................................10<br />

Shielding ..........................................................................40<br />

Show LON modules ................................................112, 113<br />

Signal ............................................................................162<br />

Signal direction ...............................................................147<br />

Signals ...........................................................................147<br />

Signs .................................................................................5<br />

8 Index<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 189


8 Index<br />

Signs and symbols ............................................................. 5<br />

Single door mode ............................................................. 66<br />

Smoke detector ................................................................ 83<br />

Software update ............................................................. 137<br />

Software version ........................................................ 31, 37<br />

Software versions ............................................................. 83<br />

Source of special drive signals .......................................... 15<br />

Special display ............................................................... 119<br />

Special drive .................................................................. 166<br />

Special drive signals ......................................................... 24<br />

Special parameters ........................................................ 108<br />

Speech codes ................................................................ 119<br />

Speech output ............................................................... 119<br />

Speed correction function ............................................... 107<br />

Speed threshold ............................................................. 168<br />

SS-Curtain ..................................................................... 140<br />

SS-CurtainWait .............................................................. 140<br />

Standards and regulations .................................................. 7<br />

Standstill monitoring ......................................................... 45<br />

Start method .................................................................. 107<br />

Start monitoring ............................................................. 106<br />

State ............................................................................. 147<br />

State bytes F1 and F2 ...................................................... 17<br />

State messages ......................................................... 10, 11<br />

State of the safety circuit ................................................... 22<br />

States of the car ............................................................... 18<br />

States of the pre-selection relays ....................................... 19<br />

static charges .................................................................... 8<br />

Statistics ............................................................... 105, 136<br />

STATUS .................................................................... 34, 42<br />

Status messages ................................................. 10, 13, 33<br />

Stop Max ....................................................................... 107<br />

Stop-when-full ................................................................ 137<br />

Storage ........................................................................... 38<br />

Strain relief ...................................................................... 91<br />

Suspension height ............................................................ 92<br />

Switch 1 .. 3 ................................................................... 108<br />

Symbols ............................................................................ 5<br />

System .......................................................................... 136<br />

System ID ..................................................................... 115<br />

System location ............................................................... 31<br />

SYSTEM STOP ............................................................... 13<br />

T<br />

Technical data – ADM I ......................................... 81, 84, 87<br />

Technical data – FPE ................................................. 72, 77<br />

Technical data – FPM ....................................................... 65<br />

Technical data – FSM ....................................................... 53<br />

Technical data – FST-2 ..................................................... 38<br />

Technical data – LON bus ................................................. 91<br />

Technical data – Trailing ribbon cable ................................ 92<br />

Technical regulations for lifts (TRA, Technische Regeln für Aufzüge) 7<br />

Temperature range ........................................................... 38<br />

190 FST-2_HB.EN12/05


Terminal resistance .............................................................8<br />

Terminal resistance (terminator) .........................................91<br />

Terminals and plugs – ADM I .......................................82, 85<br />

Terminals and plugs – FPE ..........................................73, 77<br />

Terminals and plugs – FPM .........................................68, 89<br />

Terminals and plugs – FSM ...........57, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63<br />

Terminals and plugs – FST-2 .............................................45<br />

Terminals and plugs – LON bus .........................................92<br />

Terminals and plugs – Trailing ribbon cable .........................93<br />

Terminator ...................................................................8, 91<br />

Test drive .......................................................................145<br />

Test menu ................................................................33, 145<br />

Time ................................................................................27<br />

Time 1 .. 6 ......................................................................108<br />

Trailing cable ....................................................................92<br />

Trailing ribbon cable ....................................................57, 92<br />

U<br />

UPDATE COMPLETE! ......................................................29<br />

UPDATE FILE NOT FOUND! .............................................29<br />

Update GST ...................................................................137<br />

Update LON modules ......................................................137<br />

Use text .........................................................................114<br />

USER ERROR .................................................................13<br />

User interface .....................................................................9<br />

V<br />

Ventilator .......................................................................116<br />

V-Mon. test bottom ..........................................................145<br />

V-Mon. test top ...............................................................145<br />

W<br />

WAITING TO RESET... .....................................................29<br />

Weight sensor ..........................................................15, 118<br />

Z<br />

Zone message ..................................................................14<br />

Zone Sw.DOWN .............................................................127<br />

Zone Sw.UP ...................................................................127<br />

ZoneB Active ..................................................................128<br />

ZoneB–Hysters ...............................................................130<br />

ZoneB–Length ................................................................130<br />

ZoneB–Level ..................................................................130<br />

8 Index<br />

FST-2_HB.EN12/05 191


Your NEW LIFT-Hotline: E-mail: hotline@newlift.de<br />

Lochhamer Schlag 8 Phone: +49 (0) 89 / 89 866 110<br />

D-82166 Gräfelfing Fax: +49 (0) 89 / 89 866 300

Hooray! Your file is uploaded and ready to be published.

Saved successfully!

Ooh no, something went wrong!